ReportWire

Tag: underscored-best-of

  • Best laptops of 2022 | CNN Underscored

    Best laptops of 2022 | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    Whether you work from home, go to an office or just want something to keep yourself entertained, a good laptop is all but a necessity these days. But with so many brands and models to choose from, finding the right notebook for you can be overwhelming.

    That’s where we come in. We extensively test the latest laptops on the market from the likes of Apple, Dell and Samsung in order to help you figure out what’s actually worth spending your money on. Whether you’re in search of the perfect MacBook, a tricked-out gaming notebook or just something basic for your daily emails, here are our picks for the best laptops you can buy now.

    Best Apple laptop

    The MacBook Air M2 is the best Apple laptop for most people, perfect for everyday multitasking and able to handle a good amount of gaming and video editing. It’s the fastest laptop you can get for the money, and an especially big upgrade if you’re coming from an Intel-powered Mac.

    The MacBook Air M2 is the new gold standard for Apple laptops, marrying some of the best performance we’ve ever seen in a notebook with an overhauled and attractive design that has lots of practical benefits.

    The biggest refresh to the MacBook Air in over a decade, Apple’s new laptop ditches the iconic, wedged look of old in favor of a more uniform chassis that’s in line with the latest 14-inch and 16-inch MacBook Pros. And while it doesn’t appear slimmer than the M1 Air at first glance, it actually is — with pleasingly thin 11.3-millimeter edges and a 2.7-pound body that’s marginally lighter than its predecessor. That all translates to a laptop that we’ve found incredibly easy to pick up, and one that we barely felt in our backpack while on the go.

    The M2 Air also adopts all of the modern niceties of the larger MacBook Pros, including the display. You get a noticeable amount of extra screen space compared to the previous MacBook Air (and the new M2 MacBook Pro) at 13.6 versus 13.3 inches, plus the M2 ditches the thick black borders of old for a thin, seamless bezel, while content still pops with plenty of color and detail.. Apple’s Magic Keyboard feels as great as ever on the latest Air, and you get satisfying, full-size function keys for making quick adjustments — no dreaded Touch Bar here.

    Perhaps the biggest physical upgrade to the M2 Air is the revamped MagSafe charger, which, like on the bigger MacBook Pros, allows you to easily attach and detach the charging cable with a quick magnetic snap. On top of reducing the chances that your laptop goes flying after someone trips on your wire, the MagSafe port also frees up the two USB-C Thunderbolt 4 ports for your accessories. We still wish the MacBook Air’s port selection wasn’t so slim (the larger MacBook Pros have HDMI, an SD card reader and an additional USB port), but the addition of MagSafe is a welcomed one — as is the nice color-matched braided cable and compact charging brick that includes an extra port for charging your phone.

    Other notable upgrades include a 1080p webcam that looks marginally better than the 720p one on previous models, as well as a more robust sound system that pumps out rich (but not speaker-replacing) audio. And then there’s the Air’s new Apple M2 processor, which makes it one of the fastest laptops we’ve ever tested.

    The MacBook Air M2 held up to our usual multitasking workload (a mix of email, video calls, Slack, Discord and way too many Chrome tabs) without ever breaking a sweat, and stayed cool and quiet during hours of light music production in Ableton Live. But our benchmark results tell the real story. The MacBook Air posted the highest single-core result we’ve ever gotten on Geekbench 5 (which measures general performance), and came impressively close to the new MacBook Pro M2 when it came to multi-core and graphics capabilities. We also saw roughly a 16% gain in overall performance scores compared to the MacBook Air M1 from 2020. You can certainly do some light gaming on this machine, though we saw low framerates and an excess of heat when running Shadow of the Tomb Raider at its maximum settings. That highlights one of the few advantages of the otherwise dated $1,299 MacBook Pro M2, which sports an internal fan for better sustained performance under pressure.

    The MacBook Air M2 frequently got us through long workdays with plenty of battery to spare, largely matching up to Apple’s 18-hour battery rating. However, on our more intensive battery test, which consists of continuous 4K video playback, the MacBook Air’s 5 hours and 21 minutes of runtime fell to the new MacBook Pro by about 45 minutes. Expect great day-to-day endurance, but definitely keep a charger handy for gaming or video editing sessions.

    The new MacBook Air’s biggest caveat is its price — starting at $1,199, it’s $200 more expensive than the still-excellent MacBook Air M1. You’ll get marginally better performance from the M2 chip, but the real question is this: are you willing to pay an extra $200 for a bigger display, a better webcam, a sleeker design and a useful MagSafe charger? If the answer is yes, and if you’re coming from an Intel-powered Mac or getting your first MacBook, then the MacBook Air M2 is the best laptop you can buy. But if you’re on a budget and can live without those modern conveniences, the $999 (and often discounted) MacBook Air M1 remains an excellent purchase.

    Best Windows laptop

    The Dell XPS 13 is the best Windows laptop you can buy, offering a stunning display, a great keyboard and long battery life within an attractive, slim design that’s easy to take anywhere.

    The upgrade pick

    The 14-inch MacBook Pro offers beastly performance for serious power users, as well as the best ports, display and speakers you can find on a MacBook.

    Best 2-in-1 laptop

    The Surface Pro 8 delivers fast performance, a vivid display and an excellent keyboard within a versatile, detachable design. It’s also a much better value than the newer Surface Pro 9, which doesn’t add much beyond slightly faster processors and an optional 5G variant.

    Best gaming laptop

    The Asus ROG Strix G15 Advantage Edition offers the best combination of performance, battery life, features and value of any gaming laptop we’ve tested, all packed into an attractive and highly customizable design.

    Display

    13.6-inch, 2560 x 1664 Liquid Retina display

    13.4-inch, 1920 x 1200 display

    14.2-inch, 3024 x 1964 Liquid Retina XDR display

    13-inch, 2880 x 1920 display

    15.6-inch display at 1920 x 1080 and 300 Hz

    Processor

    Apple M2

    12th Gen Intel Core i5 / i7

    Apple M1 Pro or M1 Max

    11th Gen Intel Core i5 / i7

    AMD Ryzen 9 5900HX with AMD Radeon RX 6800M graphics

    Memory

    8GB / 16GB / 24GB

    8GB / 16GB / 32GB

    16GB / 32GB / 64GB (M1 Max only)

    8GB / 16GB / 32GB

    16GB

    Storage

    256GB / 512GB / 1TB / 2TB SSD

    512GB / 1TB SSD

    512GB / 1TB / 2TB / 4TB / 8TB

    128GB / 256GB / 512GB / 1TB

    512GB

    Camera

    1080p FaceTime HD

    720p

    1080p FaceTime HD

    1080p front camera, 1080p rear camera with 4K video

    N/A

    Ports

    Thunderbolt 4 (2), MagSafe charging port, headphone jack

    Thunderbolt 4 (2), microSD card slot (USB-C to USB-A adapter included)

    Thunderbolt 4 USB-C (3), SDXC card slot, HDMI port, MagSafe charging port, headphone jack

    Thunderbolt 4 (2), Surface Connect port, headphone jack

    USB-C (1), USB-A (3), HDMI, Ethernet port, headphone jack

    Battery life (rated)

    Up to 18 hours

    Up to 12 hours

    Up to 17 hours

    Up to 16 hours

    8 hours

    Size and Weight

    11.97 x 8.46 x 0.44 inches, 2.7 pounds

    11.63 x 7.86 x 0.55 inches, 2.59 pounds

    12.31 x 8.71 x 0.61 inches, 3.5 pounds

    11.3 x 8.2 x 0.37 inches, 1.96 pounds

    13.8 x 10.2 x 1.1 inches, 5.5 pounds

    Price

    $1,099



    $1,598



    $1,999



    $800



    $1,700

    While there are a number of factors to consider when choosing the right laptop, we advise that you start by figuring out how much display you need. Most laptops are available in display resolutions ranging from 1080p to 4K (3840 x 2160), and in screen sizes from 13 to 17 inches. Many Windows machines also offer optional touch displays.

    We think a 13 to 15 inch laptop at 1080p is the sweet spot for most people, as you’ll get very good clarity and a decent amount of real estate within a machine that’s still fairly portable and reasonably priced.

    Display: 13” to 15” at 1920 x 1080
    Processor: 12th Gen Intel Core i5 or i7, AMD Ryzen 5 5000 or Apple M1/M2 
    RAM: 8GB or more
    Storage: 512GB or larger solid state drive
    Ports: At least two USB-C connections

    A higher screen resolution means you can see more detail when using apps and watching movies, or get more screen real estate for apps (assuming you are willing to look at very small text), but it can also drive the price of a laptop up considerably. So a 4K display (or alternative display technology options like OLED, also available in very high screen resolutions) makes the most sense if you do a lot of graphics work or use your laptop as your main entertainment screen for movies and TV, (though you’ll get the most benefit if you choose a 15” or larger display). Also think about how you’ll be using your laptop — a slim 13-inch notebook is ideal for working on the road, while a 17-inch machine isn’t quite as portable, but will get you more screen space (and possibly more power) for working at your desk.

    Many Windows-based machines also offer optional touch displays, but we generally feel that you can skip this to save some cash. Unless you’re looking to carry only one device and are specifically looking for a 2-in-1 laptop that doubles as a tablet, we think a dedicated tablet does a better job at touch, and touch doesn’t add that much functionality to a laptop.

    Many modern laptops are slim on connectivity options, usually packing a handful of USB-C ports in addition to a microSD card reader and a headphone jack. If you want a laptop that can connect to USB-A gadgets (and chances are you have a lot of those) as well as traditional HDMI cables for external displays, you’ll want to check out some of the thicker, business-class Windows notebooks out there from manufacturers like Acer and Lenovo. Alternatively, you can pick up a USB-C hub to augment your Mac or Windows laptop’s connectivity options.

    Windows laptops come with a swath of processor options, but we consider the latest 11th Gen Intel Core i5 or the AMD Ryzen 5 5000 series to offer a good amount of performance for everyday multitasking for the price. And to back that processing power up, we recommend opting for at least 8GB of RAM to keep all of your apps running smoothly. If you’re someone who does heavy creative work such as video and photo editing, it’s worth considering Core i7/Ryzen 7 as well as 16GB to 32GB of RAM. And if you’re a gamer, you’ll need a laptop with discrete graphics, starting with at least an Nvidia GTX 1660 Ti or AMD RX 5600 XT.

    Of course, you’ll also have to decide between Windows and Mac, which largely comes down to personal preference. Windows can be found on the largest range of laptops, including budget notebooks and powerful 2-in-1 workstations, and offers a better selection of gaming software. Meanwhile, macOS is limited to a handful of Apple’s own laptops, and is ideal for folks who already own lots of Apple products thanks to its ability to sync up with your iPhone, iPad and Apple Watch. Windows laptops can be found for as cheap as a few hundred dollars, whereas MacBooks occupy a premium middle ground that starts at $999 for the MacBook Air or $1,999 for the higher-end MacBook Pros.

    As with every CNN Underscored review, we rigorously test devices both quantitatively and qualitatively. For laptops, we made the decision to benchmark first to get a standard for quantitative performance. If you’ve read our standalone laptop, tablet or mobile phone reviews, these tests will be familiar.

    On Windows laptops, we performed GeekBench 5 and PCMark 10 tests. These run the laptops through a series of workflows and application processes, many of which you’d find yourselves (and we found ourselves) completing on a daily basis. For Mac laptops, PCMark 10 is not available, so Geekbench 5 was performed. If a laptop is gaming-capable, we run it through the Shadow of the Tomb Raider benchmark to see how it’ll hold up against many of the best PC games.

    Regardless of operating system, we put each laptop through our standard battery test, which involves charging the laptop to 100%, setting brightness to 50% and engaging airplane mode to ensure connectivity is off. We then loop a 4K video file with the sound set to 15% until the battery dies and the machine turns off.

    The combination of battery and benchmark testing gives us a quantitative feel for the devices and a hard number for each that can be used for comparisons. We then used each laptop as our daily driver for work, play and entertainment tasks, testing the battery to see if it could last through a full day of tasks, watching a movie to get a feel for the display and, of course, running a bunch of different applications.

    The MacBook Air M1 was our best Apple laptop pick for nearly two years running, and is still one of the best laptops you can buy. Its zippy M1 performance and long battery life continues to hold up against newer competitors, and its keyboard and display remain some of the best you can get at this price. We think the MacBook Air M2’s updated design, MagSafe charger and faster performance are worth the extra $200, but for those on a budget, the MacBook Air M1 is a fantastic value — especially since it’s often on sale.

    In terms of sheer performance, the MacBook Pro M2 is one of the best laptops we’ve tested. Its M2 processor runs circles around anything in its price range, and makes this machine ideal for intensive video editing and graphics work. It can also survive a full day of work on a charge, and endured close to an hour longer than the MacBook Air on our tests.

    However, all of this awesome power is stuck in a dated design that looks and feels exactly like the last few iterations of the 13-inch MacBook Pro. That means you’re getting a Touch Bar you probably don’t want, a meh 720p webcam and the same old 13.3-inch Retina display with thick black borders around the edges. Those considering the 13-inch MacBook Pro should either opt for the MacBook Air M2 — which has similar performance and a much better design for $100 less — or splurge for the far more expansive 14-inch MacBook Pro.

    The Surface Laptop 5 is an extremely close runner up for the title of best Windows laptop, offering a big, beautiful and uniquely tall screen, a great keyboard and strong overall performance and battery life. But its design, while attractive, is a bit dated and bulky compared to the competition, and you’ll get better specs for the money on the XPS 13.

    The Surface Pro 9 retains everything great about the Surface Pro 8, but doesn’t add much. Its virtually the same as the 2021 model, just with faster 12th Gen processors, a nixed headphone jack and an optional 5G configuration that makes serious performance sacrifices for always-on connectivity. Unless you need 5G or like the Pro 9’s color options, you’re better off saving your cash on the still-great Pro 8.

    The Samsung Galaxy Book 2 Pro 360 is an excellent 2-in-1 laptop, offering fast performance and more than 11 hours of battery life. If you’re deep into the Samsung ecosystem, you may find its plethora of preloaded first-party apps useful — but if you’re not, you’re looking at lots of bloatware. On top of the Book 2 Pro 360’s excess software and relatively low display resolution, we still prefer the Surface Pro 8’s more versatile, detachable design.

    The $599 Surface Laptop Go 2 is a very good pick for students or folks on a tight budget, offering dependable performance and just about the best build quality you can find for the price. However, you’ll realistically want to get the $699 model that comes with a more usable 8GB of storage and fingerprint reader. When you factor that in, we still think the $549 Dell Inspiron 14 is the best overall value for Windows users.

    In terms of sheer performance and versatility, the Surface Laptop Studio is arguably Microsoft’s best notebook yet. Thanks to its durable, flexible hinge, this 2-in-1 works well as a laptop for everyday multitasking, a sturdy drawing tablet and a stand-up display for giving presentations or watching movies.

    It’s also the only Surface with optional discrete Nvidia graphics, making it ideal for demanding visual tasks and even some light PC gaming. However, with an expensive starting price that only gets higher if you opt for a dedicated GPU and more processing power, we’d only recommend this machine to artists, video editors and general power users.

    The Surface Go 3 packs a full Windows 11 experience and a surprisingly good webcam into a tiny 10-inch tablet, which turns into a comfortable mini laptop once you attach a Type Cover keyboard. However, its performance can be frustratingly slow at times, and its alluring $399 starting price quickly balloons closer to $800 once you configure it with a keyboard and halfway decent processor.

    The 16-inch MacBook Pro has everything we love about our upgrade pick in the 14-inch model, just with a larger screen and a few more configuration options for really maxing out the processor. It’s a great choice if those two things matter to you (and if you have the cash to spare), but we think the 14-inch MacBook Pro’s lower starting price and more portable design make it the better pick for most power users.

    Read more from CNN Underscored’s hands-on testing:

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • Best coffee subscriptions of 2022 | CNN Underscored

    Best coffee subscriptions of 2022 | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    There are tons of coffee subscriptions on the internet, all with different and overlapping coffees, formats and perks. We searched far and wide for the best and most popular services out there, and narrowed it down to 10 we tried for ourselves. If there was a coffee quiz, we took it. If the coffee came with a postcard, we read it. Most importantly, we ordered and tasted coffee from every single subscription to find the absolute best.

    After nearly two months of quizzing, grinding, sipping and notetaking, we’ve come up with the best coffee subscriptions.

    Best coffee subscription box overall

    Blue Bottle’s coffee subscription won us over with its balance of variety, customizability and, most importantly, taste. The flavors are complex and bold, but unmistakably delicious. Beyond its coffee, Blue Bottle’s subscription is simple and easy to use, with tons of options to tailor to your caffeine needs.

    Best coffee subscription for those who crave variety

    Trade has a helpful coffee quiz, plenty of customizable settings and more than 400 coffees to choose from. With a seemingly unlimited variety of coffee beans to choose from there will always be new and interesting coffees for you to try. Plus, Trade allows you to pick which coffees are sent to you, giving you more control than many other services.

    Best coffee subscription for the budding connoisseur

    The Black Box subscription from Angel’s Cup will have you feeling like a coffee connoisseur in no time. This subscription sends you a box of four different roasts, with only the roast date and a five-digit number to differentiate them. The idea is that each shipment is a blind tasting, so once you brew and drink each coffee, you can go onto an app to rate it for yourself and record any notes.

    Blue Bottle

    Blue Bottle’s coffee subscription hit all of our marks during the testing process. It has multiple kinds of subscriptions perfect for all kinds of coffee drinkers. With its solid customizability, variety and — above all — outstanding taste, Blue Bottle beat out every other coffee subscription we tested.

    We’ll dive into everything we loved about the Blue Bottle product in a moment. But first, we want to point out all the various subscription options available on the site. You can choose between subscriptions that send you blends, single origin coffees, decaf and even espresso beans, depending on your cup of choice. The espresso, single origin and blend options have what’s called an assortment subscription, which is the best pick if you want to try different coffees all the time. The blends assortment and espresso assortments rotate between five- and four-set offerings respectively, so if you opt for the blends assortment subscription, for example, you’ll be getting one of five coffees each shipment. These start at $11 per shipment, but that’s for a 6-ounce bag, so you’ll probably want to upgrade to a 12-ounce bag at $18 per shipment. Or, you can select a single coffee and get that one delivered over and over again until you change it yourself.

    But if you’re a more adventurous type and want new flavors with every shipment, Blue Bottle’s single origin assortment subscription is the one for you. Blue Bottle searches the world and sources high-quality beans, then roasts them lightly to bring out their natural flavors. Best of all, the coffee changes every two weeks so you can try brand new beans with every shipment. This subscription starts at $13 per shipment for a 6-ounce bag, but the standard 12-ounce bag runs for $22 per shipment.

    None of that would really matter if the subscription experience — or even worse, the coffee — was bad. To Blue Bottle’s credit, the subscription was simple to navigate and receiving our boxes was a joy. Each shipment comes with your selected coffee, plus a little notecard that has information on your coffee’s history and taste. While these cards weren’t as fun and engaging as some of the others (such as Atlas Coffee Club’s postcards or Angel’s Cup’s blind tasting), the information Blue Bottle gives you is all you need to thoroughly enjoy your brew.

    We also loved the customizability of Blue Bottle’s subscription. While it doesn’t provide as many options as some of the others, you can still select from four different coffee sizes — from 6 ounces up to 36 ounces — and four different delivery options between one, two, three and four week intervals.

    The service really has all you’ll ever need to get the cup of coffee you want, but the biggest factor that tipped the scales in Blue Bottle’s favor was its taste. We tried both single origin and blend roasts from Blue Bottle, and every single time we ooo’d and ah’d at the bold, delicious flavors. Of course, flavor is subjective, but over a wide variety of roasts, Blue Bottle consistently tasted better in our tests. Does that mean you’ll love every coffee Blue Bottle has more than every other coffee we tested? No. But we think you have the best chance of getting an outstanding cup of coffee, no matter the roast or blend, with Blue Bottle.

    When we tasted the coffees, we particularly loved the Giant Steps blend, which had punchy notes of cocoa, toasted marshmallow and graham cracker. We also fawned over a single origin roast from Guatemala that was extremely smooth and had a sweet taste that mirrored the included tasting notes which mentioned brown sugar and cinnamon.

    No matter what you want from a coffee subscription, Blue Bottle tailors an experience that will always provide you with freshly roasted, delicious coffee right at your doorstep. With resealable bags, shipping included in the coffee’s price and tons of other features we absolutely loved, if you’re going to try a coffee subscription we can’t recommend Blue Bottle enough.

    Trade

    While Blue Bottle was our winner outright, nipping at its heels was the coffee subscription from Trade. Its enormous selection of more than 400 coffees is enticing to the coffee addict who wants to try new flavors all the time. Plus, Trade’s coffee quiz was surprisingly effective at finding a roast we loved, and can help guide you through the sometimes overwhelming options. While we didn’t love the taste as much as Blue Bottle’s options, we’re confident you’ll find a coffee match made in heaven with Trade.

    Trade’s subscription works slightly differently than Blue Bottle. First off, Trade sources coffee from roasters from around the world, unlike Blue Bottle which has its own branded varieties. The next big difference is when you subscribe to Trade, you’re going to have to go through its coffee quiz. You’re asked seven questions such as how you brew your coffee, what you like and don’t like flavor-wise, if you typically add milk or sugar, your preferred roast level and more. After you complete the questionnaire, it presents you with multiple picks that they think you’d like based on your answers.

    When we took the quiz, we matched up with The Overnighter from Joe Coffee, which had deliciously strong, chocolatey tastes that had us refilling our cup the whole day. While the coffee quiz from Blue Bottle touted 10 total questions in comparison to Trade’s seven, Blue Bottle’s quiz is totally optional and only really helps you find blends to try. Trade, on the other hand, forces you to take the quiz before you can even subscribe, so you’re more likely to find a coffee tailored to you right away.

    Trade’s coffee quiz was one of the highlights of the subscription for us, but most of the other services had a similar quiz. What pushed Trade beyond those competitors wasn’t any one fancy feature, but its consistently scoring high across almost all of our tests.

    You can customize certain factors of your subscription such as grind size, whether you want one or two bags delivered and whether you want those to be delivered every one, two or three weeks.

    A nice touch of the Trade experience was a little note explaining why the curators picked each coffee for you. It told us that our coffee was good to brew in a french press, strong enough to handle milk and even provided a couple tasting notes, but it didn’t go into as much detail as some of the others with an extensive list of flavors to expect and a history of the coffee. Though if you love your coffee and want to learn more, you can always hop onto Trade’s website and read about the roaster and bean. Perhaps most importantly, there are some really tasty options in their immense variety of coffees, allowing Trade to easily push ahead of many of the other subscription services as a well-balanced option.

    If you want a custom-fit coffee subscription experience with tons of variety and a service that can either use algorithms and curators to pick every coffee you get, or let you browse through the hundreds of options yourself, Trade is the subscription service we’d recommend for you.

    The Black Box from Angel's Cup

    Angel’s Cup offers three different kinds of coffee subscriptions: All Stars, Cupping Flights and The Black Box. All Stars is more or less a standard subscription, in which Angel’s Cup sends you one bag of coffee at intervals of your choice. These bags were highly rated by other Angel’s Cup subscribers, so you’re sure to get a delicious coffee. But we recommend Angel’s Cup because of its other services, namely, The Black Box subscription.

    The Black Box is basically an upgrade of the Cupping Flights. Both send you a box of their own branded coffee packaged in four small bags without any information so you can blind taste them. After tasting, you go to Angel’s Cup’s mobile app to input and rate your tasting notes, comparing your scores to the roastmaster and other people who have tasted the same coffee. This doesn’t inform what Angel’s Cup sends you in the next shipment (which is actually a feature at Driftaway), rather it’s so you can test and grow your palate.

    The Cupping Flights subscription starts at $8.99 per shipment, and includes four 1-ounce bags, which is just enough for a big 16-ounce mug of coffee. It’s good if you’re the only coffee drinker in your house. If you have more than one person who wants in on the tasting, or if you just like to drink a lot of coffee, The Black Box sends four 2.75-ounce bags, each enough to make 44 ounces of coffee, or about four normal sized mugs. All four bags nearly add up to a standard 12-ounce bag, so you can expect your full shipment to last as long as your traditional bean bag. This subscription starts at $17.99 per shipment if you commit to 12 shipments.

    The Black Box was one of the highlights of our testing, providing an engaging and memorable experience to our morning coffee routine. We loved visiting the app and inputting our own thoughts and gripes about each coffee. The app itself isn’t cutting edge and could use an update, but it’s a fun, interactive element no other service even came close to.

    Angel’s Cup doesn’t offer a coffee quiz, there’s no way to change the amount of coffee you get besides choosing different subscriptions and the flights ship every Wednesday, which is more restrictive than the many others that ship to order. Despite those mild shortcomings, Angel’s Cup delivers delicious and intriguing coffees, and its blind tasting format made us want to hone our palette and become real coffee aficionados.

    In regards to taste, the coffees we tried from Angel’s Cup all tasted great. Not as bold as Blue Bottle or personalized as Trade, but every cup was a high-quality brew that we’d have no qualms about drinking daily. They had a wide variety of flavors; some were subtle and fruity, while others were dry and toasty. Overall, we enjoyed the taste of the coffees from Angel’s Cup a lot.

    If coffee is your passion (or maybe you need something new to kill time since you’re at home all day), The Black Box from Angel’s Cup is a fun way to pretend you’re a coffee connoisseur. What it lacks in customizability it more than makes up for with the best coffee drinking experience we had throughout our entire testing.

    We tested coffee subscriptions for nearly two months, researching each service’s website thoroughly as well as going hands-on with every single brand’s coffee to test the packaging, experience, taste and more. We tried a wide variety of coffees from each brand, receiving multiple bags of beans and different roasts whenever possible.

    To test taste, we ground, brewed and drank each coffee in the same exact way, and wrote down what we liked and didn’t like, while reading the coffee’s tasting notes to see if they were accurate. However, since taste is subjective, we didn’t want to only test how the coffee tasted, but also the subscription services themselves. Through our research, we compared variables such as coffee variety, roast freshness, customizability, delivery options and more to see which service was the best. Here’s a full breakdown of all the tests we ran.

    Subscription service

    • Coffee Variety: We went onto each subscription’s website to see how many coffees it offered, what kinds of coffee it offered and how often those offerings change.
    • Personalization: We went through any coffee quiz or questionnaire the service provided, and judged how easy it was to find a coffee you’d like right off the bat.
    • Size and delivery options: We counted the different size and delivery options for each coffee subscription.
    • Customizability: We looked on the websites to see how much you could customize your order. We counted all the options you could change such as the roast level, grind size and whether you prefer decaf or regular coffee.
    • Refunds and Exchanges: We researched if you could get a refund or exchange your coffee if you didn’t like the coffee you got in the last shipment.
    • Extras: We received each shipment, and in doing so looked for any extras including notecards, information sheets, tasting notes and more. We judged how much these extras added to the coffee subscription experience, and if they were helpful and informative.

    Coffee

    • Taste: We tasted each subscription multiple times after grinding and brewing in the exact same way. We used an electric burr grinder and a french press, and drank each coffee black and with a splash of oat milk, both hot and iced.
    • Roast freshness: We looked on the websites to see how fresh each roast was, and also compared the roast date to the delivery date of each coffee shipment we

    perSimilar in overall approach to Trade (and drawing on many of the same third-wave American roasters), this newer subscription service from Breville has a lot to offer with a curated-by-flavor approach that’s a good way to check out new beans. That said, the flavor families — chocolate, caramel and fruity — are a bit broad, and the price per bag is on average a dollar or two more expensive than Trade’s.

    A quiz points you towards coffees you might like (and we were pretty happy with the results), and you can order whole beans or beans ground to taste, in amounts ranging from 2-5 bags per order on the cadence you desire (selectable in one-week intervals from delivery every week to once per month; it’s easy to change on the fly if you feel like you are getting too much or too little coffee). We subscribed for several months and were able to settle in on a delivery schedule that ensured we always had a fresh bag on the way as we were finishing up the prior order.

    Really the only downside here is that there are so many other options, some of them less expensive, offering nearly the same products. This speaks to how good small roasters have been about getting the world out and scaling up their output, but it means you can shop around for the best deal, even if your tastes are fairly esoteric.

    We’ve reviewed Atlas Coffee Club in the past, and while we loved it (and still do) it didn’t quite break out past its competitors. The coffee tastes great, it comes in extravagant bags that look great on a counter and the postcards included are filled with useful tasting notes and interesting coffee history. Despite these great attributes, Atlas just fell a little short with its limited variety and lack of coffee quiz. Atlas, as a coffee of the month service, sends out one coffee a month from a different country, and you can only change the roast level and grind size, which was a bit more limiting than other services.

    Mistobox offers an even wider variety than Trade with over 590 coffees at the time of writing. Mistobox’s coffee quiz has seven questions, which was an adequate amount to find a coffee we enjoyed. You can also get very specific with which kind of coffee you want, filtering your pick by grind, roast level and whether you want a single origin, blend, espresso or decaf bean. On the other hand, the coffee didn’t taste quite as great as some others, you can only order the bags in one size and the shipment was absent of any attention-grabbing extras. But if you’re looking for a subscription with a massive selection of coffee, Mistobox can go blow for blow with Trade any day.

    Bean Box didn’t impress us too much, as it didn’t have an especially wide variety, have tons of flexibility for size and delivery or have informative extras. The taste of the coffees we received was a little lackluster, and the beans came 10 days after being roasted, longer than other services that can get it to your door in just a few days.

    Driftaway’s small variety and limited size and delivery options knocked it down a peg or two. However, we loved the format or the subscription, and think it could be really good for someone who doesn’t exactly know what coffee they like. The first shipment you get is a tasting flight, and you rank which ones you like the best. Driftaway will then select coffees similar to that so you can build a flavor profile. Driftaway also puts sustainability at the core of its operation with practices such as eco-friendly packaging and carbon offsets for every shipment, which we really appreciated.

    Crema Co touts a massive coffee selection with over 450 options and has a thorough, nine question quiz that’s fun and engaging. The taste of the coffees we got was alright, but didn’t blow us away. And while the package did come with a handwritten note that says who packed your box, there wasn’t any info on the coffee or tasting notes that we would’ve enjoyed. Our biggest gripe with Crema Co’s coffee was the bags it was packaged in. They were extremely hard to open and we ended up just slicing them with a knife. That means we couldn’t reseal the bag and would’ve had to store the beans in a separate air-tight container.

    Peets was one of the best in terms of taste, which was a surprise to us. The coffee we tried was dark and full of flavor, and out of all the coffees we tried we’d say it was the one we’d want to drink every day. However, the coffee variety was lacking with only around 50 options, and the coffee quiz only had five questions, which was fewer than many of our other top-ranked services. Peets also didn’t come with any extras, and the bag wasn’t easily resealable.

    Craft Coffee didn’t have as big of a selection as others, and its coffee quiz just simply asks you to select a coffee you like from a drop down menu of popular choices you might find at the store. Craft does have a ton of delivery options, where you can get a shipment anywhere from once a week to every three months, but without any extras, a middle of-the-road taste and a bag that was difficult to open and reseal, Craft didn’t separate itself from the pack.

    Read more from CNN Underscored’s hands-on testing

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • The best hard-shell carry-on luggage of 2022 | CNN Underscored

    The best hard-shell carry-on luggage of 2022 | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    There are hundreds of carry-ons on the market these days, from established luggage brands and from newcomers hoping to disrupt an expensive industry with affordable, high-quality gear. With tons of options to choose from, picking the right bag for your trip can be overwhelming. We’ve already tested the best checked luggage for your travel plans. Now, after researching dozens of cases, we zeroed in on 12 of the most popular luggage bags with especially high praise from users and professional reviewers, and then put them through the wringer to determine the best carry-on suitcase.

    For this piece, we focused exclusively on hardside (or “hard-shell”) luggage, as in our experience this has proven to be the best at actually protecting your stuff. New materials mean today’s hardside luggage is also often incredibly lightweight and flexible enough to pack to the brim. We also only tested four-wheel spinner cases, as these are generally easier to maneuver than two-wheel cases (and any difference in packing space is negligible). For those interested in lighter, expandable luggage pieces, we’ve taken a separate look at soft-shell carry-on bags.

    After weeks of testing, we’ve settled on four cases that will serve nearly any traveler’s needs. Take a look at our picks, rationale and testing process below.

    Best overall hard-shell carry on luggage

    The Away Carry-On has everything you want in a suitcase: durability, thoughtful organization, smart features and chic design — at a fair price point to boot.

    The Away Carry-On has everything you want in a suitcase: durability, thoughtful organization, smart features and chic design, all at a fair price.

    Away’s offering stood up very well to our abuse, handling being kicked, jumped on and dropped down stairs with only minor scuffing and zero lasting dents. This is due to the materials it’s constructed with: The outer shell is 100% polycarbonate, an extremely strong yet lightweight and flexible material that’s become the gold standard for hardside luggage.

    Away also utilizes smooth YKK zippers, an aluminum telescopic handle and the Rolls-Royce of luggage wheels: four double Hinomoto spinners, which in our testing glided seamlessly on pavement, hardwood and grass alike. The bag also never felt like it was going to tip over, even when fully loaded.

    To be fair, Away’s top and side carry handles are a bit flat and stiff — a minor issue since the bags will typically be rolled rather than carried, but an issue nonetheless. The telescopic handle was also one of the wobbliest we tested. That said, Away claims the handle is meant to be this flexible to better absorb shock, and no issues with the handle actually arose in our testing. We also liked that the handle itself is black rather than the brushed steel color typical of most cases, as this better matches the trim and detailing on the bag.

    Away really shines, however, when it comes time to actually pack it. The case features the best internal design of the bunch — a simple yet effective system that will keep your stuff organized without overcomplicating things or clogging up valuable packing space. One side consists of a deep pocket covered by a full-zip divider, good for hard or bulky items; the other side is topped by a removable, buckle-down compression board that helps you wring every bit of space out of the 39.8 liter bag. The compression board also features a larger zip pocket that’s the perfect size for sliding your laptop into it; since the board is meant to sit atop your clothing, this automatically offers extra padding for your delicate electronics.

    Thoughtful touches like this helped push the Away into our top spot. For instance, a lot of bags also feature clamshell designs with one fully zipped side and one with some sort of strap to hold clothing down. But with the Away, that zippered side has a mesh covering, meaning you can actually see what you’ve packed without having to dig around in your bag. The inclusion of a hidden, water resistant laundry bag and leather luggage tag are nice touches as well.

    Whether or not you want a smart suitcase is a matter of preference, but it’s nice to have the option. Away was the only case we tested that actually comes with a battery pack (a 10,000 mAh travel-friendly charger, to be precise). It also has the easiest battery removal process of the cases tested by far, since you can simply pop the battery out of the case while it’s still shut. The case also has two charging ports, whereas all but one other we tested (the Genius Pack Supercharged) had only a single port.

    At 8.1 pounds, the Away certainly wasn’t the lightest bag in our testing, but we think the extra (literal) baggage is a fair trade-off given everything else you get. And if you’re positive you don’t want a smart suitcase, just purchase the Away without the battery pack to save a little weight.

    Finally, Away’s lifetime warranty and free and easy returns for 100 days shows that the company stands by its product. And, of course that product looks fantastic: With a sleek design and nine tasteful color options (plus frequent limited-edition shades), you can pick something that won’t look like every other black suitcase on the conveyor belt.

    If you think you’ll be returning from a trip with a ton of souvenirs, it’s worth considering grabbing an expandable case like the Calpak Ambeur, or upgrading to Away’s Bigger Carry-On (bearing in mind the risk that this might meet all international carry-on requirements). Otherwise, the Away Carry-On is the hardside suitcase we’d reach for most. As essential as a good travel pillow, this bag will serve almost all travelers’ needs for years to come, and will look fantastic while doing it.

    A luxurious hard-shell runner-up choice

    The Delsey Chatelet has a luxurious feel and an outer shell made of 100% polycarbonate, an extremely strong yet lightweight and flexible material that’s become the gold standard for hardside luggage

    The most Instagrammable hard-shell carry-on luggage

    The Calpak Ambeur Carry-On has a sleek, monochromatic exterior thatis endlessly Instagrammable. Even the wheels and telescopic handle match the rest of the case.

    Best affordable hard-shell carry-on luggage

    The Samsonite Omni has a fully polycarbonate shell with a micro-diamond texture that prevents scuffing and keeps the back from feeling bulky.

    Best overall hard-shell carry on luggage

    A luxurious hard-shell runner-up choice

    The most Instagrammable hard-shell carry-on luggage

    Best affordable hard-shell carry-on luggage

    What we loved

    Made with a strong but lightweight 100% polycarbonate outer shell, smooth YKK zippers, an aluminum telescopic handle and the Rolls-Royce of luggage wheels: four double Hinomoto spinners, which in our testing glided seamlessly on pavement, hardwood and grass alike.

    Classic and glamorous design with a luxurious-feeling. Comfortable handles, easy break system and scuff-proof.

    Gorgeous bag with a sleek, monochromatic exterior, a squishy cushioned grip that made for an ultra comfortable carry and exceedingly lightweight.

    Affordable and sturdy with a fully polycarbonate shell and lots of internal space.

    What we didn’t like

    Heavier than other bags we tested.

    Heaviest of our top picks and slightly bulkier than the Away bag. The excess weight could cause trouble when trying to carry this bag onto certain international flights.

    Can surpass size and weight restrictions on some airlines when using the expandable part of the bag. The expandable part of the bag is also made of fabric, which is inherently less durable than the hard shell itself.

    Omni lacks a horizontal side handle, which really comes in handy when lugging a case up and down stairs and when removing it from an overhead bin.The wheels are also single, rather than double, spinners, which are slightly less sturdy and more prone to getting caught in cracks in the sidewalk.

    Key Specs

    8.1 lbs, 39.8-liter capacity, two device charging ports, lifetime warranty

    9.3 lbs, 44.9-liter capacity, 10-year warranty

    6 lbs, 46-liter capacity that expands up to 2 inches, 2-year warranty

    6.8 pounds, 41-liter capacity, 10-year warranty

    Price

    From $275



    $226



    From $195



    $170

    Suitcases need to be able to withstand a fair amount of abuse, fit a lot of stuff, and roll without a hitch. We broke up all the factors that matter to travelers into categories, and then evaluated how each case held up.

    Materials and durability

    • Outer materials: We assessed the materials used in each case’s outer shell, zippers, telescopic handle and wheels.
    • Internal materials: We felt the materials used in the lining of cases for softness and stretched and bent any internal compression straps.
    • Dent and scuff test: We jumped on the cases. We kicked the cases and whacked them with hammers. We tossed the cases down a flight of stairs, much to the annoyance of our neighbors. Then we assessed how busted up each bag looked, as well as how easy it was to wipe away scuffs and pop out dents.

    Capacity and Organization

    • Internal volume: We measured the packable interior of the bags and also noted reported capacity in liters while making sure they met carry-on size limits.
    • Packing experience and organization: Just as important as capacity is how the space within a bag is actually used: Is the organization overwhelming, nonexistent, or just right? We assessed the utility of any internal pockets, straps, and dividers. Then we actually packed and unpacked the bags with the same set of items, noting how easy it was to keep our things organized, shove in last-minute items after closing the case and get at things once the case was reopened.

    Performance

    • Weight: We weighed the bags (unpacked).
    • Maneuverability: We rolled the bags across carpet, hardwood, cracked pavement and grass, and assessed how quietly, steadily and smoothly each bag moved.
    • Top and side handle comfort: We carried each bag up and down a flight of stairs using both handles, and assessed the comfort of each bag’s handle grips.
    • Telescopic handle comfort and stability: We raised and lowered the handle, and wiggled it around to assess wobbliness. We also used the handle to drag each bag, fully upright and as well using only the two front wheels, around the bumpy streets of Brooklyn.
    • Smoothness of internal and external zippers: We zipped and unzipped multiple times, with the bags both packed and empty, and noted any snags or resistance.

    Style

    • Multiple color options: We researched how many color or design options are available for each bag’s outer shell.
    • General impressions: We assessed the bag’s general look and vibe, as well as any options for customizability.

    Additional Features

    • Charging: We noted whether each bag had charging capabilities, and, if so, how easy that charger was to connect and remove and how many ports the case had.
    • Expandability: We noted whether, and how easily, the bag could expand.
    • TSA locking mechanism: We noted whether the bag had a TSA-approved lock, and also how easy this lock was to both set and use.
    • Other extras: We noted whether the bag came with meaningful extras — like included laundry or garment bags, luggage tags, brakes or electronic tracking systems.

    In addition to the above, we also factored in the price of each bag.

    A note on rankings: Differences in volume and materials were often so minor as to be negligible. An extra liter of space or a few ounces of weight here and there aren’t going to make a meaningful difference for the average traveler. Some cool features also have downsides. Expandable cases are obviously going to offer you more room, but that comes at the cost of potentially tipping the scale for what’s allowed in your carry-on bag (not to mention the fact that the expandable portion of the case is less durable than the rest of the shell). Charging, too, is really a matter of preference.

    That’s not to say that some bags aren’t significantly better bets than others. It’s just to remind you to think about how you’ll actually be using a piece of luggage before getting too bogged down in very minor differences that probably aren’t going to affect your travel experience.

    Finally, a note on polycarbonate vs. ABS outer shells. If you’re curious as to whether polycarbonate is really worth the major jump in price, the answer is usually yes. It’s not only more durable, but it’s also lighter and more flexible than ABS. That means you can often squeeze a few more things into the case, that dents pop out more easily, and that you can trust that your bag isn’t going to crack in baggage handling.

    We ultimately considered each bag with all of the above in mind, taking care to determine what factors would really matter to the most travelers.

    We loved the Aviator’s internal design and compression system, which is actually quite similar to Away’s. We also loved that the Aviator is made from recycled materials and looks like an old-timey trunk. We’d be happy to use this case, but it lacks Away’s lifetime warranty and charging capabilities, despite being about the same weight and more expensive. If price isn’t an issue and you don’t care about smart features, or you’ve simply fallen in love with the look of the bag and Paravel’s mission, it’s still a good pick.

    The Aero is another case that performed well in most of our tests and had a huge capacity. The super shiny exterior was also somewhat prone to scratches, however, and the case itself was rather heavy and bulky compared to our top picks.

    The Travelpro Crew 21 is a sturdy, lightweight option from a trusted brand. Alas, the case’s sloped top was a dealbreaker, as it prevented us from stacking a tote or pet carrier on top of the case while rolling it. We also disliked the uneven packing space inside (with one side much shallower than the other), and the flap covering the USB port was somewhat frustrating to close. The top and side handles were also very tight to the case, making it hard to slide our hands through.

    This beautiful bag is truly, shockingly light. But for this price, we’d want something perfect, and unfortunately this isn’t. There’s no side carry handle, and the single barred telescopic handle, while space-saving, put a major strain on our hand when dragging the case behind us.

    Briggs and Riley International Expandable Spinner

    $599 at Briggs & Riley

    This bag excelled in our durability tests, and features both a fantastic warranty and beautiful craftsmanship. The internal compression-expansion system is pretty cool too. What we didn’t like, however, was the disparity in packing space once you open up the bag. One side is much deeper than the other, which resulted in more layers when packing — and meant more digging through our stuff to find anything once the bag was opened.

    A super durable bag that suffered from the same misstep as the Genius Pack Supercharged: There’s just too much going on inside. The built-in packing cubes are oddly placed, to the point that packing and unpacking were rather tedious. The flap covering the outer USB port was also flimsy and maddening to close.

    American Tourister Moonlight Hardside Expandable Spinner

    At its sale price, the Moonlight isn’t a bad value. It has lots of packing space, a simple yet useful internal design and tons color and design options. But this bag also dented and scuffed very easily when jumped on (it’s entirely ABS rather than polycarbonate, which certainly had something to do with that). The outer coating quickly crinkled up, and marks remained quite visible after any dents were popped back into place. Part of the draw of this case is its looks, but you can’t expect it to stay pristine for long.

    Though very affordable, this was our least least favorite case. It’s a “basic” case, and it sure feels like one. This, like the American Tourister case, features a less durable ABS shell that dented quickly and retained lasting marks after our tests. Inside is lined with a very crinkly polyester, and the expandable side is also the side with a full zipper divider — an odd design choice that made packing less efficient. To use the case’s full capacity, you have to basically zip it shut, and then pile things awkwardly on top of that zippered compartment (which also oddly wasn’t flush with the outer edge of the bag). Overall, we’d rather shell out for a more expensive case that will last longer and feel nicer to use; travel is uncomfortable enough as it is.

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • Best microwaves in 2022, tried and tested | CNN Underscored

    Best microwaves in 2022, tried and tested | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    You might only have a transactional relationship with the squat rectangle on your counter or above your fridge. Warm burrito. Melt butter. But if you’re in need of a new one, know that you can expect more from the device that nukes your chicken noodle soup because today’s models have plenty of options besides ‘add 30 seconds.’ The latest microwaves have sensors to determine just how long a potato needs to be cooked, plus they integrate with your smart home setup you can control via mobile apps. . And they’re available in sizes to fit any counter and style, from retro-inspired compact devices to capacious ovens big enough to handle dinner for a large family..

    We tested nine different microwaves by heating frozen burritos, popping popcorn, warming canned soup, cooking potatoes, and intentionally heating sticks of butter until they exploded (and then cleaning it up) to discover which microwave deserves a spot in your kitchen.

    The best microwave overall

    The understated, well-built Toshiba EM131A5C-BS Countertop Microwave outshone more expensive models and delivered even heat and consistent results.

    The best compact microwave

    The GE Smart Countertop Microwave provided steady performance in a compact package with an intuitive interface, and the smart features make setup simple.

    Jonathan Bender/CNN Underscored

    Microwaves are like supporting actors, you want them to be there to do the job without having to think about how hard they’re working. The understated Toshiba EM131A5C-BS Countertop Microwave, with even heating and solid performance that equalled that of pricier models, is a strong candidate to join the cast of your kitchen appliances.

    The Toshiba’s rounded, sedate design keeps it from looking too boxy or flashy. The tapered handle feels sturdy and is plated to match the face (it’s available in stainless steel or black stainless steel) of the microwave. At 1.2 cubic feet and 1,100 watts, it was right in the middle of all of the models we tested for size and power. And it offers you the option to turn off the display when you’re not using the microwave or mute the beeps when you are cooking.

    The microwave has six pre-programmed settings (popcorn, potato, rice, veggie, frozen pizza, and frozen entree), two defrost settings, and sensor cooking. There’s a button to soften or melt chocolate or butter, as well as a keypad for express cooking (pressing ‘1’ starts the microwave for 1 minute.).

    The interior light was best in class, clearly illuminating a bowl of soup well enough for us to judge that it was warm enough for kids at 1 minute and ready for the rest of us 15 seconds later. The settings were reasonably accurate as well, thoroughly cooking a half-pound potato in slightly under 7 minutes and evenly popping popcorn with only a dozen unpopped kernels left in the bowl.

    We only had minor complaints about the Toshiba’s performance. It’s a bit louder than the quietest models we tested — you can still easily have a conversation while it’s running; but you’ll know that someone is making popcorn. And it took 3 minutes for the frozen burrito to get hot — more in line with the smaller microwaves in the 900 watt range — and we lost some beans being lost out the sides in the process.

    The interior and door were easy to wipe down after our exploding butter test, and the turntable has a small lip that kept butter from pooling underneath. Got more room in your kitchen? The Toshiba microwave is also available as a 1.3 cubic feet smart model that works with Alexa as well as in a 1.6 cubic feet inverter model if you really need a lot of space.

    Underscored best microwave GE smart countertop

    Jonathan Bender/CNN Underscored

    The GE Smart Countertop Microwave is a neat little choice if you’re looking for a smaller microwave oven with practical touches. It’s got a clearly laid out interface and sensible design. And it is one of the smallest and least expensive microwaves available with truly smart features, perhaps the smartest among them is that it alerts you to your mistake if you try to start it before you’ve placed your food inside.

    The smart features make setup simple. We were using the microwave via a downloadable app in under 10 minutes. One up and running, the GE Smart can scan barcodes for many packaged foods (although likely not for everything in your freezer) to set cooking time and power accordingly, and recognize voice commands from Google Home and Amazon’s Alexa.

    But more importantly, the GE Smart was a goodperformer even when used without the smart features.. Six program buttons give you quick access to common settings from warming a plate of food to cooking vegetables, along with reheating and defrosting settings. Analog users will find program instructions at the top of the frame inside the door. The door slides open by a push button, which gives it a lower profile; but is less effective than a handle.

    Rated at 900 watts, this smart microwave is less powerful than some of the larger models available for around the same price. That meant warming soup and heating a frozen burrito did take nearly a minute longer than models with more wattage; but the soup was heated evenly and our frozen burritos didn’t burst even with the additional time. And this smaller microwave evenly cooked a spud that could be mashed or eaten as a baked potato with a fat pat of butter.

    The interior – at 0.9 cubic feet – is snug; but we were still able to fit a bag of microwave popcorn on the 10½ inch turntable. The interior light was bright, which let us know that the bag needed an additional 15 seconds to pop all but 10 of the kernels.

    While no microwave is really portable, it was easier to lift the 28-pound model on and off the counter than some of the large models we tested that can weigh in at close to 40 pounds. The GE microwave was loud at the start; but got quieter once it was running. And there’s an option to silence the beeps, if you’re trying to eat popcorn after your kids’ bedtime. The small interior was quick and easy to clean of butter spatter. The brushed stainless front only took a few wipes, but the black border at the top did show fingerprints.

    The best microwave overall

    The best compact microwave

    What we loved about it

    This mid-size microwave with an easy-to-grip handle delivers steady performance without taking up too much counter space. It’s quick to clean and has a bright interior light to keep an eye on popcorn.

    It’s a smart appliance at a much lower price than other smart models that performs well whether you’re using the keypad or your smartphone. It’s got an intuitive interface and simple styling that means it can fit in a lot of different kitchens.

    What we didn’t like about it

    The Toshiba is a bit loud while running and didn’t heat a frozen burrito as quickly or evenly as the other models we tested.

    As a compact microwave it has a smaller interior and turntable, as well as lower wattage than larger models. It also has a push button, rather than a handle, and you’ll pay a slight premium for smart features.

    Measurements

    20.5” wide x 17.1” deep x 12.9” tall / 34.6 pounds

    19” wide x 14.5” deep x 11.5” tall / 28 pounds

    Wattage

    1,100 watts

    900 watts

    Price

    $149.99



    $119

    Underscored best microwave soup

    Jonathan Bender/CNN Underscored

    There are three main types of microwaves. Many newer homes will have one of two types of built-in models, installed either in a cabinet below the counter or above the stove in place of a range hood, and generally incorporating an exhaust fan. In either case, these models are larger and more expensive, and your choice is likely limited by your current kitchen design (or by your renovation budget).

    For this review, however, we looked at countertop microwave ovens: smaller, less expensive and very capable models suited for renters, apartment dwellers, those with smaller homes, or anyone who needs a compact, flexible cooking appliance.  — those best.

    Even if you’re looking at countertop microwaves, you’ll want to decide first where it’s going to live in your kitchen. We suggest measuring your counter or pantry shelves to determine exactly how much space you have for a microwave.

    While exterior finishes range from hard plastic to stainless steel, and you will want something that works with your decor, you’ll also want to focus your attention on the controls and features. Handles make it easier to close and open doors, whereas push buttons give a microwave a lower profile. If you’re an occasional microwave user, presets (pre-programmed functions designed to cook certain foods for a set amount of time at a set power level) likely won’t matter; but if you’re cooking a baked potato once a week, it’s nice to hit a few buttons and walk away.

    While microwaves are available in very compact sizes, with many compact models measuring around 700 watts, with about 0.7 cubic feet of cooking space, we looked primarily at mid-size units from 900 watts up to to 1,250 watts. More wattage typically speeds up the time it takes to cook, reheat, or defrost a given amount of food. Typically the more powerful models have larger interiors. Keep in mind that mid-size models, ranging from 1.1 to 1.4 cubic feet, are big enough to fit a 12-inch dinner plate. Compact models typically can’t fit a full-size dinner plate because of smaller turntables (around 10 inches) and narrower interiors, though they have smaller footprints for tight kitchens and within their space limitations are often as capable as bigger models, just slower.

    Nowadays, you’ll come across many “inverter” microwaves, which can vary their power output, allowing them to cook continuously at whatever power level you set. Traditional transformer-powered microwaves can only be “on” or “off”, so when you set your old microwave to 50% power the magnetron is actually alternating between cooking at 100% and not doing anything at all. full power and no power. The idea is that inverters can provide more efficiency and more even cooking, and handle tasks like defrosting meat without accidentally cooking it on the outside or gently melting chocolate or butter. That said, in our testing, microwaves with inverters performed well (bowls of soup were cooler to the touch, for instance); but overall had results consistent with transformer models, which may speak to overall improved design.

    As for smart microwaves, we didn’t find that they provided much benefit. For us, scanning a barcode on a package or using voice commands wasn’t any faster than just typing in a few numbers or turning a dial, and you still have to place the food in the microwave. That said, they may offer additional accessibility benefits for some users, and plenty of folks just want to use their phones as their home’s nerve center, but beyond that we think these haven’t quite found their niche.

    For this review, we didn’t test convection microwave ovens or other combination devices. These are becoming more common (part of the new wave of multi-purpose countertop cooking appliances) and there are, of course, even air fryer microwave combos available nowadays. These ovens not only function as defrosters or food warmers but have an additional heating element and fan that circulates hot air, so you can bake or cook in them as you would in a toaster oven. While we didn’t consider convection models in this review, it’s something we might revisit in the future.

    Underscored best microwave popcorn

    Jonathan Bender/CNN Underscored

    Over the course of a month, we popped bags of popcorn, heated canned soup, cooked half-pound potatoes, and warmed frozen bean burritos.

    With the popcorn, we kept an eye out for burned pieces and the number of unpopped kernels. We looked at how evenly chicken noodle soup heated in a ceramic bowl and whether or not that bowl could be handled without an oven mitt after a turn in the microwave. The potatoes allowed us to check the accuracy of a pre-programmed setting or manufacturer recommendation. Frozen burritos were a test of how uniformly each microwave could defrost and heat; if the tortilla warmed too quickly it tended to split, spilling the fillings, and we were able to check whether the interior was heated through.

    We considered how heavy a microwave was to lift on and off the counter, even though we know most microwaves will stay in place until it’s time for them to be replaced. We looked at the design and functionality of each microwave: the interface, handle, button placement, and interior light. We also assessed if it was easy to use the programs or add seconds to cooking time once the microwave was in operation.

    We let butter splatter to see how much effort it was to wipe down the interior. After cooking and cleaning, we then weighed the performance of each model against each other and factored in the cost to help make a decision on which microwaves we would recommend.

    The sleek Galanz ExpressWave offers minimalist style with a pair of stainless steel bands that frame the modern black front; within it is oversized, with a spacious interior (2.2 cubic feet) and lots of power at 1,250 watts.

    The Galanz relies on a dial, rather than a number key, for adjusting the cooking time or inputting the weight of meat you’re defrosting. It also has four sensor cook pre-sets, as well as 8 reheating programs from frozen pizza to rice.

    This inverter microwave was fast, which earned it points for convenience; but not always points for performance. On the plus side, a bowl of canned soup was ready to eat in 90 seconds and a frozen burrito was evenly warmed right at 2 minutes.

    But after 1 minute and 50 seconds, the popcorn was a bit overdone with 20 unpopped kernels still in the bag. The potato preset nuked a half-pound potato for six minutes. While it was cooked through on the sides; it needed another minute to soften up the center.

    The push button to open the door of the biggest model we tested did take a bit of, well, pushing. Even with more space to clean, the interior was easy to wipe down. The front remained streak free, while the duller top showed smudges.

    The Breville offers high-end design, with a soft-close door and brushed stainless exterior (not just a stainless steel face) as well as the usual Breville convenience features, but models less than half the price perform just as well. Though it is an inverter model, we didn’t see a gain in cooking or defrosting performance that justified the price tag.

    With a whimsical greeting chime, a finishing beep that would be at home on a game show, and adorable menu icons inside the right door frame, the Breville has some softer touches that were delightful. The 1.2 cubic foot microwave also offers lots of possibilities for adjusting how long you cook or reheat your dinner. You can stop the turntable from spinning (useful if you’ve got a larger dish that might bump against the sides) and add ‘a bit more’ cooking time (as found on other Breville products such as Breville’s 4-slice toaster).

    Looking to let the inverter microwave do the work? There’s smart cook, defrost, and reheat buttons, which sense the steam released by the food in the microwave and adjust the power as needed. There’s 15 different presets that cover everything from melting chocolate to making oatmeal. A pair of dials start and stop the cooking process.

    The 1,250-watt microwave heated food evenly, although we did find ourselves often adding a bit more time (pun intended) to the programmed options. Our baked potato needed an additional minute; but was fluffy without the uncooked spots that showed up with less powerful models. The frozen burrito and canned soup were both hot within two minutes. A bag of popcorn, required a few seconds over three minutes, to pop the last kernels.

    Butter came off the interior with a quick wipe of a damp cloth and the brushed stainless hid fingerprints well.

    The Faberware was a solid performer, but needs to learn how to use its indoor voice. It effectively popped popcorn; but you wouldn’t want to try and watch a movie while it was running.

    In its favor, at 1.1 cubic feet, it has enough room to fit a dinner plate or a small casserole dish without being a counter hog. The 1,000-watt microwave was within 30 seconds of the fastest times in warming the middle of a frozen burrito and heating a bowl of canned soup.

    The LED-lit interface is intuitive with useful options up front like the ability to defrost by time or weight. It has six presets from warming beverages to cooking a potato (our half-pound test came in right under eight minutes) and a start button that can also add 30 seconds of cooking time.

    While no microwave was quiet, the Farberware was louder than other models and the door opened and closed with a clunk of the handle. The interior was quick to clean; but the exterior tended to show smudges.

    With rounded corners and a window reminiscent of a tube television, the Galanz Retro certainly lives up to its name. Chrome accents and a quartet of available colors (our tester was a pleasing mint green) were nice stylish touches on the microwave that easily fits on a counter even in an apartment’s galley kitchen.

    A compact exterior leaves less room for cooking and a 10.5-inch turntable means you can only fit an 11-inch dinner plate. Yet, at 900 watts, it still had enough power to bake a potato and warm up a frozen burrito. Heating; however, proved uneven as our first bag of microwave popcorn came out burnt (a second bag was a bit overdone; but not charred).

    The curved handle was easy to grip and the door swung open and shut with a resounding thunk. A dial at the bottom is the key control feature: you can adjust the time and input the weight of what you’re trying to defrost or cook and work your way through 7 preset cooking options and 10 reheating settings. You can also add 30 seconds by simply pressing the center button on the dial.

    The exterior and interior were easy to wipe down, although a lip at the top of the door trapped some of the splattered butter. It’s available in smaller (0.7 cubic feet) and larger (1.1 cubic feet) sizes if you’re searching for a microwave to complete the vintage look of your kitchen.

    If you’re nostalgic for the microwave you had in college, the Black + Decker will take you back to your dorm room. The smaller dimensions (a little over 19 inches wide and under 12 inches tall) makes this a good fit for apartment or galley kitchens.

    While you gain counter space, you do sacrifice some power (it’s 900 watts) and room to cook. A bag of popped microwave popcorn – with about two dozen unpopped kernels – had only a bit of clearance on each side and took up most of the 10-inch turntable, which could (unsurprisingly) fit only a 10-inch dinner plate.

    The compact microwave has the same set-up as the Farberware (this is a good thing), so you’ll know what to do even before you read the instruction manual. Soup took a bit over 2 minutes to warm, and our burrito needed about 3 minutes for the middle to get hot, which meant the filling started to escape the sides by the end.

    The smaller interior wasn’t hard to clean, although a bit of butter did get trapped in the push button opening when we touched it with greasy fingers. There is a smaller model (0.7 cubic feet and 700 watts); but this is already a relatively affordable option well suited to warm up your mug of morning coffee or a bowl of soup.

    Daily microwave users will be drawn to the well-appointed Panasonic NN-SN67KS. The inverter microwave has 1,200 watts and just as in Spinal Tap, the power levels go to 11.

    The sensor cook function did well, baking a potato (one of 15 pre-programmed options) in eight minutes, and the inverter appeared to do its job on our bowl of chicken soup: It heated evenly and the ceramic bowl was less hot to the touch once the cycle was completed than with other models. Our frozen burrito was hot in 2 minutes, though heating wasn’t completely even: it lost some filling as steam pressure on the warmer burrito edges pushed beans out the ends of the tortilla. Our popcorn – there are three presets for bags of different sizes – only had 15 kernels in the bottom of the bowl. There is also a keep warm feature, which can run for up to 30 minutes, that did indeed keep our soup warm.

    The push button opens the door with less effort than other models. The interface is a snap to navigate, even with a lot of choices. Beyond the standard ‘add 30 seconds’ option, the timer and clock buttons double as ‘more’ and ‘less’ buttons, adding or subtracting 10 seconds respectively.

    The Panasonic did take a bit more effort to clean, as condensation and butter got trapped between the door and the bottom frame. The 1.2 cubic foot microwave comes in four colors, as well as a 1.4 cubic foot model that syncs with Amazon’s Alexa. While it was priced higher than other testers, the microwave comes with a five-year warranty on the magnetron tube parts (and a 1-year warranty covering labor).

    The black stainless steel Samsung is shiny like a sports car (you can also opt for stainless steel) with the soul of a minivan. It’s roomier than you expect inside, yet you wish it had a bit more giddyup.

    While roughly the same exterior size as the Panasonic and Toshiba models we tested, the Samsung has more interior room (1.4 cubic feet) and a larger turnable (14.2 inches). It does however, have less power, at 1,000 watts.

    The front panel provides a button for each of the 9 sensor programs, as well as a number pad for you to punch in cooking times or select further options from the program menu. The microwave was effective, but the results weren’t competitive with our favorite models. The potatoes were cooked through; but a bit rubbery. It easily reheated soup and warmed a burrito and effectively popped popcorn (we had 15 unpopped kernels).

    All in all, this microwave functioned reasonably well; but the misses on the small details added up. The buttons needed a slightly firmer feel. The interior light was a bit too dim (ironically it has an eco mode that turns off the display when not in use). And it was a bit louder than the quieter models when running (although you can mute the beeps).

    On the bright side, the ceramic enamel interior made this the easiest model to clean and this microwave comes with a 10-year warranty on the magnetron.

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • The best products we’ve tested in October: Dash cams, water flossers and more | CNN Underscored

    The best products we’ve tested in October: Dash cams, water flossers and more | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    CNN Underscored is constantly testing products — be those dash cams, water flossers or gaming monitors — to find the absolute best in each respective category. Our testing process is rigorous, starting out by spending hours of research to find the top products in each category. Once we create a testing pool of products, we test and retest each product multiple times in real-world settings over several weeks or even months.

    This year, we’ve already tested many dozens of products — from bidets to mesh Wi-Fi routers to workout earbuds — to find the best products you need to make life better. Here are the winning products from October.

    Best workout headphones overall

    We used the Beats Fit Pro in the gym and all day for work, play and commutes, and found their secure, sweat-resistant design and superb audio make them a perfect fit for anyone’s workout, no matter whether you’re an Apple or Android user.

    Best headphones for running and outdoor workouts

    The Shokz OpenRun Pro bone conduction headphones don’t sound as good as sealed earbuds like the Beats Fit Pro, but we loved them for running and hiking, since they let you hear your surroundings as clearly as you would without wearing headphones at all.

    Best bidet attachment

    If you’re a bidet beginner and don’t want to spend too much money, the Tushy Classic mounts under your existing toilet seat and gives you a comfortable stream with just enough adjustability.

    Best water flosser overall

    This full-featured cordless flosser takes up little space on the counter, but has a big reservoir that keeps you flossing — plus it was a pleasure to use in our testing.

    Best air fryer overall

    Its heavy-duty feel, combined with the reasonable price tag, convenient controls and standout cooking results, made it easy to declare this fryer the best overall.

    Software and Services

    A good third-person action, role-playing game for Batman fans

    Gotham Knights is a brand-new, open-world, third-person action role-playing game featuring the Batman Family. Despite a myriad of problems we encountered while playing it, ultimately it did more right than wrong. So, buy it if you’re a fan of the Bat Family. Otherwise, wait for it on sale.

    Best music streaming service for Apple users

    Apple Music is perfect for individuals who are already entrenched in Apple’s hardware and software ecosystem, though it works great on other devices, too.

    Best music streaming service overall

    Spotify is a great all-around music streaming service with an intuitive interface, slick social features and a large selection of music and podcasts.

    Best music streaming service for audiophiles

    We found Tidal to be the best music streaming platform for serious listeners due to its top-tier audio quality and higher royalty payouts for music artists.

    Best dash cam overall

    A dual-channel camera that includes front and rear video cameras, this Nextbase unit was the easiest to use and delivered the most impressive image quality in our testing.

    Best screenless dash cam

    Although it doesn’t have a screen, the budget-friendly Scosche camera has, by far, the easiest mobile app to use, and promises quick and easy video playback whenever you need it.

    Best water flosser for travel

    A big battery and reservoir, along with fully waterproof construction, make this a perfect travel companion. It’s easy to use and maneuver, and just as easy to pack away.

    Best 1080p gaming monitor

    For gamers on a budget — especially first-person shooter fans — this small monitor with great color accuracy, HDR support and a fast 360Hz refresh rate really delivers.

    Best 4K gaming monitor

    Asus’ top-of-the-line 4K monitor has the best picture quality we tested along with incredibly low input lag — it’s expensive, but it’s the best gaming monitor we’ve found, and for serious gamers who can make the investment, it’s the one to get.

    Best 1440p gaming monitor

    For gamers who don’t have the fanciest systems — and that’s a lot of us — the 27-inch Alienware delivers excellent performance, with a better combination of color accuracy and fast response time than any other monitor we tested.

    Best ultra-wide gaming monitor

    With an incredible picture and speedy performance, this ultra-wide OLED from Dell delivered the fastest response times in our testing and should satisfy any gamer looking for an immersive experience.

    Best mesh Wi-Fi router overall

    Eero continues to master making Wi-Fi easier and better for the masses with a streamlined setup, wide-ranging coverage, high speeds and affordability combined with easy-to-manage parental controls, ad blocking and network security.

    Best noise-canceling earbuds

    With the best noise cancellation we’ve heard from a pair of earbuds, the Bose QuietComfort Earbuds 2 are our choice for discreetly shutting out airplane cabin noise and office chatter.

    Best noise-canceling over-ear headphones

    Perfect for commuting, the office, long flights or just around the house, the Bose 700 combines Bose’s industry-leading ANC with great sound and a new, more comfortable and stylish slimmed-down design.

    Best wireless over-ear headphones overall

    The Sony WH-1000XM5 improve on the XM4, with a slimmer design and refined noise-canceling microphones — it’s the best over-ear Bluetooth headphones you can buy. XM4 owners can wait to upgrade, but for anybody else, the XM5 are the high-end headphones to get.

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • The best water flossers in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    The best water flossers in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    There’s no sugarcoating it — oral health is incredibly important. And while brushing your teeth is the top activity you should be embarking on every morning and night, there’s more you can truly do to take care of your pearly whites. Water flossers, also known as oral irrigators, are handheld devices that serve as an extra way to clean between your teeth, in areas where your toothbrush can’t reach. With a stream of water sprayed along the gum line and teeth, any excess food and bacteria can be removed.

    To find the best water flosser, we tested nine different models across a few different brands. We incorporated water flossing into our daily oral care regime and observed every feature each water flosser had to offer. After a few weeks of rigorous flossing, we found two that were our ultimate favorites.

    The best water flosser overall

    This full-featured cordless flosser takes up little space on the counter, but has a big reservoir that keeps you flossing — plus it was a pleasure to use in our testing

    The best water flosser for travel

    A big battery and reservoir, along with fully waterproof construction, make this a perfect travel companion. It’s easy to use and maneuver, and just as easy to pack away.

    This Waterpik Ion Water Flosser is the only cordless countertop water flosser we tested. It has a large reservoir like corded units, but the compact footprint and rechargeable battery let you place it anywhere — a design that we truly appreciated, and one we’d recommend regardless of how much counter space you have in your bathroom. We were able to place the unit anywhere without having to worry about access to a plug, especially since the battery lasts up to four weeks at a charge.

    More importantly, the Ion is a pleasure to use, courtesy of a 360-degree rotating nozzle handle. In our testing, we found that rotating the nozzle is incredibly easy, even while you’re flossing. Having this option helps you position the water more accurately and can be very beneficial, especially if you have any orthodontic appliances. It came in especially handy when flossing the inside of our upper teeth — an area that’s hard to reach and easy to miss. The ION’s handle is also magnetic, making it effortless to snap onto the base when it’s time to put it away.

    Controlling the Ion is simple, with 10 different pressure settings accessible using a dial on the side of the base. There are no specialized pulse or massage modes, which we didn’t personally miss and didn’t count as an oversight.

    Seven nozzle types are included with the ION: you get two regular jet tips with color-coded bands so you can share the unit with a partner, along with an implant denture tip, orthodontic tip, “pik pocket” tip, “plaque seeker” tip and tongue cleaner. While some of these extra nozzles aren’t necessary for most people, we often used the tongue cleaner to remove bacteria buildup for fresh breath. And even though the plaque seeker tip is intended for with those with implants, crowns and bridges — which we don’t have — we enjoyed this particular nozzle as it felt as though it was giving our gums an extra cleaning. With the many nozzle options, regardless of your dental needs, you’ll find an appropriate tip to lead you on the right path for successful oral hygiene. The Ion is the only flosser we tested that offers a tip meant for cleaning fixed implant bridges and dentures. There’s also a plastic case to store all of the extra nozzles.

    The ION’s compact design also helps make it easy to place. It isn’t nearly as tall or wide as many of the countertop water flossers we tested, but even with a smaller footprint, it doesn’t sacrifice reservoir size and can hold a generous 600mL of water, which is among the largest we tested. The other countertop water flossers we tested had reservoirs that ranged from 400mL to 600mL. With the large tank size, it’s enough water to floss at any pressure setting without having to refill. The compact design also gives it a cleaner look on the countertop.

    With this flosser, you’ll also notice a 30- and 60-second pulse timer, which acts as a reminder to move to another section of the mouth. We only found this on two others we tested — which happen to be Waterpik products — and it’s definitely nice to have. We appreciated it in our tests of the best electric toothbrush, and found it a similarly useful reminder on the flosser.

    Ultimately, we were extremely impressed with this water flosser. Between the compact design, ease of use and overall effectiveness, this is a water flosser that can work well in most bathroom spaces — while also keeping your teeth clean.

    A MySmile Cordless Oral Irrigator on a marble bathroom counter, next to a sink

    If you are looking for a water flosser you can take with you, then the MySmile Cordless Oral Irrigator is by far the best around. On a full charge, this cordless flosser lasts approximately 15 days, and a provided travel bag makes it easy to pack. And since the water flosser is small enough to fit in a typical shower caddy and is fully waterproof, you can even keep it in the shower for a few weeks at a time, for those who find flossing in the shower easier and less messy. Registered dental hygienist Nicole Barbour, who works for a dental practice in Newton, Massachusetts, even suggests flossing in the shower as it “resolves the complaint about the water flossing mess and makes the habit [of water flossing] much easier to develop.”

    Although the MySmile Cordless Water Flosser is compact, it doesn’t skimp on tank size. With a 350mL reservoir, it’s twice the size of the other portable water flossers we tested. This allows most consumers to complete a full flossing session without needing to refill the tank — something that you might have to do with many other portable flossers.

    The flosser also features a digital display showing the setting, water temperature, water quality and battery life — a feature that we only encountered on this water flosser. While we thought the battery life indicator was useful to know when we’d need to charge again, we personally didn’t find much value in the water information. However, if you have sensitive teeth or are in an area where water quality might not be safe, then having the information at hand could be beneficial. Additionally, with the smart memory capability, the setting selected — either soft, child, strong, normal or pulse — will stay the same the next time you use the flosser. Four of these modes act as your pressure setting, where the pulse mode ultimately pulses water into your mouth, instead of a constant jet stream.

    We also found the flosser incredibly easy to use and maneuver. And to actually get the water flowing, you have to press the on/off button twice, a feature we greatly appreciated. This reduced the number of times that we accidentally turned the flosser on and caused a water mess around the bathroom — which happened quite often with many other portable flossers. The 360-degree rotating nozzle was also one of the easiest to use and made flossing around our entire mouth much easier without having to turn the handle in a different direction. For those with braces or other orthodontic appliances, this should come in incredibly handy.

    This flosser also offered the most nozzles out of any of the flossers we tested, with a total of eight attachments: four regular jet tips (including one for high pressure and one for low pressure), a pik pocket tip, a plaque seeker tip, an orthodontic tip and a tongue cleaner. Although we didn’t notice much of a difference between the regular jet tips, having multiples is nice, even if it just allows you to not have to purchase replacements for awhile.

    With a compact and portable design, a large water tank, a variety of nozzles and a handful of pressure settings, it’s no surprise that this one truly beats all of the other portable options out of the park.

    The American Dental Association (ADA) advises that the “use of an interdental cleaner (like floss) is an essential part of taking care of your teeth and gums.” But the organization doesn’t recommend any particular method of interdental cleaning, pointing to a 2019 review of the literature on the topic by Cochrane Oral Health that found the evidence for the effectiveness of water flossers (or “oral irrigators”) was “limited and inconsistent”

    Research and innovation continue in the area, however, with several varieties of interdental cleaners gaining popularity over string floss with dental professionals (who, like the ADA, are often just trying to get people to pay attention to interdental cleaning at all more than arguing for the efficacy of any tool), including interdental brushes, wooden and rubber tooth-cleaning sticks, and, of course water flossers, which replace (or augment) a physical cleaner with a stream of water.

    Like traditional flossing, the goal of water flossing is to remove food and bacteria in places your toothbrush can’t reach — between your teeth, at the gum line, in areas concealed by orthodontic appliances or dentures and so on. This ultimately reduces plaque in your mouth as well as the risk of cavities, gum disease and tooth decay.

    Many water flosser brands claim that water flossing “removes up to 99.9% of plaque from treated areas.” Waterpik points to a large number of studies supporting the claim water flossing is more effective than traditional methods, including one that suggests water flossing is significantly better than string flossing for plaque removal and an improvement over interdental brushes with regard to overall gingival health. Philips has publicized research suggesting the same, including a study demonstrating similar results with regard to plaque removal. A team at BioSci Research Canada has found evidence that when combined with a manual toothbrush, a water flosser is significantly more effective than string floss in removing plaque from tooth surfaces (this study was performed with a Waterpik water flosser).

    That said, the majority of these studies have been small and there is no clear consensus on which approach is best. The dentists and hygienists we spoke to told us that water flossing isn’t a replacement for brushing and shouldn’t replace string flossing. Rather they suggest that water flossing is great for people with dexterity issues, orthodontic work and even periodontal disease — all of which can make string flossing or interdental brushing difficult, uncomfortable or painful. Barbour told us that her ideal scenario is for “every patient to [string] floss nightly and then use a water flosser as an adjunct to flossing.”

    When using a water flosser, you’ll want to fill the water flosser’s tank with lukewarm water — a recommendation given by most brands, especially for those with sensitive teeth or gums, and something we found more comfortable in our personal experience. To reduce a water mess in your bathroom, make sure you are leaning over the sink and put the nozzle in your mouth first, prior to turning on the water flosser. Or, if you have a portable water flosser, many are waterproof, allowing you to floss in the shower.

    Just like brushing your teeth, you’ll want to ensure to floss throughout your entire mouth. This includes the top and bottom, back and front. You’ll want to floss along the gum line and in between each tooth.

    But like most products on the market, there are many water flossers to choose from. While we found they all got gunk out of our teeth, some are easier to use than others and offer extra settings or nozzles for a better clean, especially for people with specific dental needs. There’s also a wide range of features and accessories between products. So before you purchase your next water flosser, here are the main features to consider.

    Size and power source

    Based on our personal experience, we suggest you pay careful attention to the size of the unit. Countertop water flossers are significantly larger than portable ones and typically need to be plugged in (although there are a few countertop cordless options). Taking your countertop space into consideration will help you determine whether a countertop or portable flosser is right for you.

    But even if you have a large countertop, you need to determine the location of your wall plug. Having a corded water flosser far away from a plug means you have long cords wrapped around your countertop, which isn’t ideal.

    You’ll also want to take into consideration whether or not you’ll want to travel with your water flosser or even take it into the shower with you. For these scenarios, we found that a cordless portable option — one that is also waterproof — to be a great option.

    The reservoir tank holds the water used while water flossing. The amount of water the tank can hold has a direct impact on how long you can floss without it being refilled. The flossers we tested had reservoirs ranging from 175mL to 600mL in size; we found that a tank size of 350mL or more can typically last for an entire flossing session, though the pressure setting and mode used can also affect the amount of water used.

    Pressure settings and modes

    Most water flossers offer multiple pressure settings and modes. We found that most countertop flossers offer 10 different settings, while the portable options have just a handful. The average user will only need a few settings; however, there are few situations where you’ll want to ensure you are using a specific pressure option.

    Barbour informed us that many patients, especially those with gingivitis, may experience discomfort when first using a water flosser. For these patients, starting on a low setting is preferrable. But as the “gums heal and inflammation decreases, a higher setting may not only be better tolerated, but also offer better reach under tighter gingival margins.” Many of the products also suggest starting on a lower setting and then working your way up to a setting that feels most comfortable. A higher setting can also come in handy if you are looking for a quick blast between your teeth where food is lodged in between.

    In addition to pressure settings, some water flossers offer a pulsing or massage feature where the stream of water is pulsating out of the nozzle. According to Waterpik, this helps stimulate the gums and can help remove loose plaque from below the gumline — a useful option for patients with receding gum lines and periodontal disease. Philips suggests that all modes on today’s water flossers provide roughly equivalent cleaning; additional pulse and massage modes are meant to increase comfort for those who can’t tolerate a direct stream, making it more likely that they will continue flossing.

    Barbour told us that she feels massage mode has an effect similar to traditional rubber-tip gum stimulator, and while she can see the rationale in including this feature on a water flosser she “hasn’t seen a body of independent research to prove whether this feature is actually effective or necessary.”

    A set of four water flosser tips on a white marble counter

    All water flossers come with a classic jet tip, which works like a pressure washer, producing a stronger stream by virtue of forcing water through a small opening, Philips supplies a “Quad Stream” tip, which is meant to cover a larger surface area with each pass, giving users more of a chance to remove buildup. (They’ve demonstrated the effect on artificial surfaces, where it removes the great majority of biofilm; in the mouth, Philips claims that the Quad Stream tip is up to 180% more effective than string floss in promoting healthier gums in users with moderate to severe gingivitis.)

    Many of the flossers we tested come with extra specialized nozzles that are beneficial for certain users. It’s important to speak to your dentist about your particular needs, and none of these nozzles are meant to be used on their own. Rather, they should be used in specific areas while a general-use tip is used to clean the rest of the mouth. And in no case is any tip meant to replace toothbrushing.

    “Plaque seeker” and “dental implant” tips are meant to get into and remove plaque from difficult-to-reach spaces around implants, crowns, bridgers and retainers — space where, Barbour told us, “maintaining periodontal health and attachment levels around implants is critical.” Waterpik’s plaque seeker tip is covered with soft bristles that can gently and safely be placed against the gumline. Barbour also recommends this tip for beginners who “haven’t used a water flosser before and might have some trepidation about being able to properly adapt to one.” We agree after testing, and particularly liked the gentle feel.

    Orthodontic tips are similar, designed for removing food and plaque from underneath wires and around brackets and bands. Barbour told us that this type of nozzle is “helpful to remove the plethora of food and plaque that accumulates around braces, especially since it can be difficult to thoroughly clean with a toothbrush.”

    The soft rubber pik pocket tip is meant for people dealing with periodontitis who have developed periodontal pockets. Meant to be used with the lowest pressure settings, these small, soft rubber tips can reach into the space between the tooth and gum, an area impossible to reach with string floss and a challenge for any other interdental cleaner.

    A group of 10 water flossers grouped together on a marble bathroom counter

    To help find the best options, we selected nine popular water flossers. Over a three-week timeframe, we tested each water flosser during our normal brushing routine, brushing our teeth with an electric toothbrush and then using the water flosser. We also used the flosser after many meals when we could feel food stuck in between our teeth.

    After squirting water in our mouth an excessive amount of times, we examined every feature and assessed each water flosser in the following categories.

    We analyzed how each water flosser is charged — whether it needs to be plugged in while in use or cordless powered by batteries or a rechargeable option.

    We also tested to see how easy it was to fill each reservoir to the maximum amount of water possible, ensuring no water splattered on our countertop along the way. During this process, we also measured the water reservoir to see how much water it could hold, as this has a direct impact on how long one can floss their teeth without having to refill with water.

    We examined the size (width and height) of each water flosser and the amount of counter space it takes up.

    We also assessed the overall look and feel of the water flosser, particularly how easy was it to hold the handle with the nozzle at a 90-degree angle against the gumline (which is the recommended stance). We also determined whether or not the nozzle holder rotates, allowing the flosser to move around the mouth in a simpler manner.

    We assessed whether or not the water flosser offered multiple pressure settings, different modes and a variety of nozzles. We also utilized the various settings, modes and nozzles for each respective water flosser.

    As we do with any household item, we looked into the warranty and satisfaction guarantee options. We also looked into whether or not the water flosser received an ADA Seal of Acceptance, awarded by the American Dental Association’s Council on Scientific Affairs after review by independent experts. Although we found that Waterpik and Philips are the only two brands to have received this approval, Barbour told us that she is comfortable with her patients using other brands.

    The Philips Sonicare Power Flosser 7000 System is expensive, but it truly has it all — though perhaps more than you need in one device. If you are looking for a corded countertop flosser with all of the bells and whistles and don’t already have an electric toothbrush you like, it might be worth looking into, but otherwise you might end up paying for more than what you actually need.

    For starters, the base houses both a water flosser and an electric toothbrush charger. This allows you to keep all of your oral hygiene needs in one space, with the combined design taking up less counter space. It also uses just one outlet, which could be beneficial for some. However, if you don’t need the toothbrush component, there’s also the Philips Sonicare Power Flosser 3000, a stand-alone water flosser with the exact same features.

    The water flosser offers 10 different pressure settings with four different modes: clean, deep clean, sensitive and massage. We felt as though the differences were extremely subtle and not a huge selling point for the flosser. We also found that the water flow with the clean mode was slightly shaky and didn’t give us the consistent stream of water that we found with most of the other flossers we tested. The deep clean and sensitive mode also offer what Philips calls pulse wave technology, where a subtle pulse is used as an indicator to move from one tooth to another. Unfortunately, we preferred the feeling of the water flow from many of the other flossers tested.

    In addition to the standard nozzle, the Philips Sonicare Power Flosser 7000 comes with a comfort nozzle and quad stream nozzle — both with soft rubber tips, which gave a gentle feel along the gums and were completely different than any other nozzles we tested. The comfort nozzle is otherwise like a traditional jet tip, while the quad stream nozzle has an X-shaped opening, so the stream covers a larger surface area. In your mouth, it feels as though four jets are cleaning your teeth at once. While we can’t confidently say that this in fact cleaned our teeth any better, we could feel the increase in coverage along our teeth and gums, and we truly preferred the experience over the regular jet tip.

    The water flosser also offers a 600mL reservoir and a magnetic nozzle holder. On the downside, the nozzle doesn’t rotate, a feature we found to be helpful while flossing with other models.

    The Philips Sonicare Power Flosser 3000 is very similar to the 7000 version, but with a few key differences, the main one being that there’s no electric toothbrush component. With its lower price point, there are some features that are missing, but we felt after testing that this was the better value of the two.

    The look and feel is very similar, where you’ll have access to 10 different pressure settings, although the reservoir only holds up to 550mL of water (which is still large enough). And instead of four modes, only two are offered — clean and deep clean. We felt as though these two modes are more than sufficient, especially since we couldn’t feel a big difference between the four anyways during our testing.

    The Philips Sonicare Power Flosser 3000 also comes with the quad stream nozzle, which covers a wider surface are and is a big selling point in the Philips Sonicare lineup of water flossers. You’ll also find the same two-year warranty and pulse wave technology.

    If we were to narrow down our purchase to either the Philips Sonicare Power Flosser 3000 and Philips Sonicare Power Flosser 7000, we’d pick the 3000 version. We found that the extra features on the 7000 version aren’t worth the price difference for most consumers, and many people have already adopted electric toothbrushes. But if you’re looking for a water flosser and toothbrush combination, then the 7000 system is a better option.

    The Waterpik Aquarius Water Flosser comes with seven different flossing nozzles (three regular jet tips, a plaque seeker tip, pik pocket tip, toothbrush tip and orthodontic tip), making it ideal if a speciality tip is a necessity for your oral needs. It is also the only water flosser we tested that offers a toothbrush tip, which you can use as you would a manual toothbrush, with or without toothpaste.

    The covered tank can hold 600mL of water, which during our testing lasted us around 90 seconds on the highest setting and over 4 minutes on the lowest setting, leaving you with more than enough water to complete your flossing session without having to refill the water tank.

    On the base, there’s an easy-to-use dial that offers 10 different pressure settings. You can set your pressure prior to flossing, while also turning it up or down during the process. In addition to the standard flossing mode, there’s also a “massage” mode where you’ll find a pulsing stream of water. With the regular flossing setting, there’s also a 30-second pulsar reminding you to move from one half of your mouth to the other ensuring you spend enough time flossing each section.

    The design is very well thought out with an on/off switch on the handle as well as a power button on the base. The nozzle also rotates a complete 360 degrees and is fairly easy to move even while in the midst of flossing. A unique feature to this water flosser is that the base can store up to two nozzles, which gives you easy access to commonly used nozzles without having to fish through your bathroom drawers. It also offers an extended three-year warranty, which is longer than most of the water flossers we tested.

    The one major downside to this water flosser is the size. As a corded flosser, it’s both wide and tall, which ultimately takes up a decent amount of space on the countertop. If you have a smaller counter space, or not enough counter space near an electrical outlet, this could be a deterrent to purchasing this particular flosser.

    The Waterpik Sonic Fusion 2.0 is a two-in-one unit, but instead of providing a separate flosser and toothbrush like the Philips Sonicare 7000, it incorporates the two functions into one unit. When you want to floss, the water streams from a hole in the center of the toothbrush. With this design, you can floss, brush your teeth or — theoretically — floss and brush at the same time.

    Despite the ingenuity of this all-in-one concept, the act of flossing with this toothbrush/flosser was not our favorite. Since a toothbrush head is much larger than a water flosser tip, we felt as though we couldn’t keep our mouth closed enough, thus resulting in a bigger mess on our counter.

    We also had a harder time angling the water to hit the gum line correctly. And while the Sonic Fusion 2.0 does offer 10 different pressure settings, we found that the pressure needed to be turned up high to feel as though it was working — which could be too abrasive for some.

    But if you’re looking for a two-in-one contraption, the flosser offers two different toothbrush heads (one compact, one full-size), a 30-second pulsar, a 400mL water tank and a three-year warranty.

    Waterpik also makes a cordless water flosser, allowing you to easily take the flosser with you on the go or even into the shower with you due to its waterproof design. Since water flossing tends to make a decent amount of mess in the bathroom, flossing in the shower can make for a cleaner experience. However, with the Waterpik Cordless Express Water Flosser reservoir only holding 175mL of water, you might find that you’ll run out of water quickly and need to refill. During our testing, we found that we were able to get about 30 to 45 seconds of flossing depending on the setting. There are also only two setting choices and we found that the two settings weren’t as soft or strong as some of the other flossers we tested, which offer more pressure options. If you have sensitive teeth or are looking for an extremely strong blast of water, you might not find the pressure ideal for your needs.

    Unlike most of the other flossers we tested, this one runs on three AAA batteries. This allows you to use rechargeables (and have extra power on hand instantly if you run out of charge unexpectedly), though it’s worth keeping in mind if you don’t want to deal with removable batteries. It’s also the only handheld water flosser we tested that doesn’t offer a rotating nozzle, a feature which some might find handy.

    While this one wasn’t our favorite due to the lack of features that some other flossers have, if you are looking for a basic water flosser that ultimately gets the job done, this is the least expensive water flosser we tested. It’s also the only portable water flosser we tested that has received the ADA Seal of Acceptance.

    The cordless Aquasonic Aqua Flosser is the most compact flosser we tested, although as a downside, it only contains a 175mL water reservoir. In the box, you’ll find four standard jet tips, each with its own color-coded band. Whether you are sharing the flosser amongst multiple family members or it’s a purchase just for yourself, this will give you plenty of spare nozzles without having to purchase any more for quite some time. This water flosser also comes with a storage bag, making it easy to take with you when traveling.

    There are three different settings — normal, soft and pulse — which can be selected prior to starting the flossing session or even changed mid-session. That said, while flossing, we always noticed a slight pulsing, even on the two non-pulsing mode options.

    And while the flosser offers a 360-degree rotating tip, we found it difficult to rotate while in the act of flossing. While flossing still got the gunk out of our teeth, the flosser had a cheaper look and feel to it.

    Although not our favorite of the bunch (we think overall the MySmile is worth the additional expense if you want a cordless travel water flosser), the Aquasonic Aqua Flosser is compact and inexpensive and will get the job done.

    The Smile Direct Club Wordless Water Flosser is almost identical to the Aquasonic Aqua Flosser, with the same flosser nozzles and modes offered. This cordless flosser also utilizes the same exact charging mechanism with a USB type-C cord and wall charger.

    The main difference is that you’ll only receive two color-coded jet tips, instead of four, and no travel bag. It is slightly less expensive than the Aquasonic Aqua Flosser, so whether you choose one over the other should come down to whether or not the excess parts are worth the price difference for your particular needs.

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • The best dash cams in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    The best dash cams in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    A dash cam is something you hope you won’t need, but if you do, you’ll likely be glad you have it. These compact cameras record the road ahead (or behind), and in the event of a collision, can provide video evidence for other drivers, police and insurance companies.

    There are many types of dash cams and camera systems available, from simple forward-facing cameras to dual cameras aimed at rideshare drivers; you can find both with and without built-in-displays and with or without onboard navigation systems.

    To help you figure out the best solution for your driving needs, we sourced ten popular models, installed them in our car and evaluated them on ease of installation, image quality, playback functionality and overall usability. After comparing all our testing and research data, we landed on these two options as the best overall.

    The best dash cam overall

    A dual-channel camera that includes front and rear video cameras, this Nextbase unit was the easiest to use and delivered the most impressive image quality in our testing

    The best screenless dash cam

    Although it doesn’t have a screen, the budget-friendly Scosche camera has by far the easiest mobile app to use, and promises quick and easy video playback whenever you need it.

    Alex Rennie/CNN Underscored

    If you’re looking for a high-quality dash cam that provides both front and rear coverage, is reasonably easy to use and won’t take up too much windshield real estate, this Nextbase model is a great choice. Although I had positive experiences with other Nextbase models I tested, the Nextbase 322 strikes a practical balance between the more full-featured $500 Nextbase 622 and its compact but connectivity-impaired sibling, the Nextbase 222.

    Installation was a breeze with the Nextbase 322, and mounting and connecting the rear camera to my back windshield was easier than I expected. A supplied little plastic crowbar helped to slip the wiring behind my interior panels. Unlike some other cameras that were a hassle to remove from their mounts, the Nextbase 322 connects to the “Click & Go” mount via a magnetic dock, making it really easy to remove whenever you like.

    The touchscreen controls walk you through the initial setup process (much smoother than scrolling through options with push-button controls as on some competitors’ cameras) and made on-camera playback fairly simple as well. I really appreciated the 2.5-inch size of the screen, which is small enough to not be too distracting while driving, but large enough to easily locate, select and view individual video clips without dealing with the app.

    I’ll be honest, using the Nextbase mobile app (no subscription required) was a bit frustrating at first, and requires you to re-connect to the Wi-Fi whenever you open it, but I found that to be par for the course with most dashcam apps (apart from the superior Scosche app). Once you’re connected, the app is convenient to use, and thanks to the GPS capabilities of the Nextbase 322, each video file is accompanied by a real-time map (viewable in a separate window within the app, or as coordinates in a caption if you download the video) of your route, complete with your current speed (in MPH or KPH), providing a clear and reasonably comprehensive record of where you were and how you were driving in the case of any traffic incident you may need to document

    The overall quality of the video and audio footage is crisp and clear; the 322GW records at 1080p in the front and 720p in the rear when recording simultaneously. You can also zoom in on the footage as it plays, a nice feature if you’re looking for specific details in an image.

    Unfortunately, the Nextbase video player desktop app (available for Windows or MacOS) is a bit lacking, and although it allows you to play and zoom in on your footage on a bigger screen, its buggy interface sometimes refuses to recognize any GPS data. Also, while nighttime footage is generally clear, as with other cameras, the reflection of my headlights and other light sources blew out bright areas and reflective surfaces, making it a challenge to see details like license plates and street signs. Since this effect seems to be an issue with night-vision mode on dashcams in general, I wouldn’t necessarily count it as a strike against the Nextbase 322.

    A view from with a car equipped with a Scosche NEXS1 dash cam, mounted behind a car's mirror, a street scene is visible with the camera visible at upper right.

    One of the most important things I discovered during my testing was that if you’re going to go with a screenless dashcam, the accompanying mobile app needs to work extremely well. The Scosche NEXS10032-ET app blew away the rest of the competition when it came to app functionality and overall usability. Why? Unlike the other cameras we tested, the Scosche NEXS10032-ET saves video files locally to your phone’s memory, so unlike the competition’s apps — which all required frequent Wi-Fi reconnections and multiple steps to download and view footage stored in the cloud — the Scosche app was always ready to play files instantly, wherever I was, without any waiting.

    The 1080p video was nice and crisp, and the night footage was easy to make out as well. Thanks to the integrated GPS, the Scosche NEXS10032-ET also provides an overlay with a static map of your route with each file. You can’t track your position in real-time with the footage as you can within the Nextbase app, which would have been nice — it just displays a map of your completed route.

    It’s important to note that local storage is great for immediate access, but is limited by your phone’s storage. You can select how much of your phone’s storage the Scosche is permitted to use (you are required to reserve at least 20% of the phone’s capacity for video, though you can push that to 50% or 70% if you feel like you’ll need it). Once you hit that limit, older files are deleted and replaced with newer ones. If you’d like to permanently save footage, you can either save the footage to your phone, email it to yourself or upload a clip to the Nexar cloud service (the Scoshe cameras use the Nexar cloud back end) — all simple processes done through the mobile app. Irregular road events like hard braking or collisions are automatically backed up to the cloud, which provides a mirror of your phone’s storage with no subscription required (cloud files are maintained so long as you keep them on your phone; if you delete them from the app, they’re deleted from the cloud backup as well).

    There is a catch, however — footage saved to the cloud has the same 1080p quality as other options, but it isn’t full-motion video. Rather, it’s only available in time-lapse format, at 1 frame per second (this makes the files much smaller, but sacrifices details of fast motion). Full backups of your video files are also saved to the camera’s microSD card (a 32GB card is included, though the camera can use up to a 64GB card). When the card is full, the camera deletes older fields to make space for new. So, make sure to consider your phone’s available storage capacity when considering the Scosche NEXS10032-ET.

    While installation was fairly simple and straightforward for all the cameras I tested, the Scosche NEXS10032-ET also took the top spot in this department. Its power cord, designed to be concealed behind the interior trim of your car, was designed with small rubber bumps placed roughly every 6 inches. These bumps prevent the cord from slipping back out during installation, a frustrating experience that required starting the process all over again with some of the competition.

    A drawback to a screenless camera like this one is that if your phone battery dies, or is damaged in a crash, you won’t be able to view video immediately. In that case, you’ll need to remove the SD card and wait until you have access to a computer and video player, or (assuming the incident in question triggered an automatic upload) access the cloud footage through the Nexar web app online.

    No, you don’t. Screenless cameras also tend to be smaller, and since you don’t really need to interact with them very much, you can position them behind the rear-view mirror, totally out of sight.

    But, if you do go with a screenless camera, you need to understand that the only way to upload and view video footage is either through a mobile app, or by plugging the camera or its microSD card into your computer. So, if you do choose a screenless model, the mobile app needs to be reliable and easy to use.

    If you want more playback options, and to avoid relying entirely on your phone (which could conceivably be damaged or lost in an accident), go with a camera that has a screen. Not only do screens allow you to quickly scroll through files and view playback, they’re also convenient for adjusting controls, like toggling the audio recording on and off or changing the length of loop recordings.

    Plus, since the screen provides a live feed of the recording view, you can ensure that the lens is positioned and aimed correctly when you first install it and keep tabs on it over time. A screenless camera can possibly get bumped or shifted out of position, and you won’t know until reviewing footage. These screens do tend to take up more room on your windshield and can be more distracting (although some allow you to turn off the screen while driving) though, so keep that in mind.

    If you do choose a camera with a screen, a touchscreen is worth considering. Unlike cameras that use push-button controls that require you to scroll through settings with arrow buttons, touchscreen models make it much easier to quickly access settings and playback options, providing an alternative to sometimes-cumbersome apps.

    Dash cams with additional cameras (also called multi-channel dash cams) tend to cost more, but they can be worth it if you want to ensure you have a comprehensive recording of your car’s occupants or surroundings. Cameras mounted to the back window can capture rear-end collisions (which, according to the National Law Review, are the most frequent type of car crash), as well as incidents that occur when you’re not in the car. If you have a hard-wired camera that’s able to power on when it detects the motion of an accident, it can record the license plate of a car that accidentally backs into you in a parking lot or might be able to capture enough of a visual to track down a hit-and-run driver who hits your vehicle when it’s parked on the street.

    In-cabin cameras are another option, and record what’s happening inside the car. These are probably going to be most useful to rideshare drivers who want to have proof of any incidents or issues that occur with (or involving) their passengers. Depending on how they’re positioned, in-cabin cameras can also potentially capture incidents through the side windows that front and rear cameras would not. Also an in-car recording could (at least theoretically; more on that below) come in handy if another driver or police officer accuses you of being on your phone during an accident or while driving.

    It’s worth noting that additional cameras will fill up your SD card more quickly, and to compensate, even cameras advertised as featuring HD or higher-resolution video will typically reduce video quality to save space when using multiple cameras. For example, although the Vantrue N4 advertises a 4K front-facing camera, that will drop to 1440p when all three cameras are operating.

    After my testing, as well as researching and interviewing car insurance and legal professionals, I would consider GPS capability to be the most important feature to look for in a dash cam. Since GPS-linked footage can provide a time-stamped record of your speed and the location of your car before, during and after a collision, you can provide a more comprehensive picture of any accident than with video alone.

    That being said, the accuracy of speed data provided by your GPS may come under scrutiny in court, since many things can interfere with a device’s ability to receive precise GPS location data, and those can potentially affect the recorded speed. GPS devices are also not good at responding to fast accelerations and decelerations, or changes in direction.

    Despite this issue, the general advice I received from insurance and legal professionals was this: The more information you can offer to prove you were in the right (or that another driver was at fault), the better — but to make your case, you’ll likely need a lawyer and perhaps experts well-versed in the workings of GPS and video technology to convince a judge.

    A “parking mode” setting is another useful feature. Cameras with this feature will automatically power on when they sense an accident, ensuring that they capture footage of hit-and-run drivers. This feature is available on all the cameras we tested, although in every case you’ll need to provide a constant power supply to the camera, which requires purchasing and installing a hardwired connection to your car’s battery (none of the cameras we tested included a wiring kit as standard). If you park your car on the street at night, or at long-term airport parking, this could be a good investment.

    Even for cameras with onboard screens, the ability to connect and review footage on a dedicated mobile app is very useful. This provides a backup playback option to your camera and allows you to view footage on a larger screen. Video files and trimmed clips can then be downloaded and shared with yourself or insurance companies, via email, before you even get home. Without an app, you’ll have to either rely on the camera screen or remove the SD card or camera from your car and upload the files to your computer for viewing.

    Just be sure to carefully review how these apps store and delete footage. Some will automatically provide long-term storage, while others have a limited window to save footage before it’s deleted and require additional monthly subscriptions to extend the timeframe. Neither of our top picks require a subscription for long-term storage.

    In the event you’re involved in a collision or other traffic incident, a dash cam can gather evidence that supports your account of events — but should you need to prove that in court or convince an insurer, it’s important to know that they’re not a magic bullet.

    Even if you’re not at fault for a traffic incident, and have video footage and GPS data to back that up, when it comes right down to it, video recording will only be as helpful as your insurance company or the legal system you’re working within. Before you think about how you might use dash cam recordings, you’ll want to talk to a lawyer — as dash cam manufacturers recommend.

    It is possible that having a video recording of an incident can speed up a claims process, or dissuade another driver from fighting you in court (although a very small percentage of traffic cases actually go in that direction) but they’re going to be best used if you — or your lawyer — are prepared to present and make use of video evidence in court.

    As long as the footage can be authenticated that it came from your camera and has not been edited or altered, and clearly shows the incident in question, dash cam footage is nearly always admissable in court.

    And finally, remember that dash cam footage can be used both ways. After being submitted to police or presented as evidence in traffic court, it could potentially end up incriminating you.

    Legal relevance aside, many potential dashboard camera purchasers wonder what impact the devices might have on their insurance premiums. None of the major US insurance companies offer any kind of discount for having a dash cam. The only company that currently does, Branch Insurance, offers an 8% discount, but their limited coverage and negative reviews make them tough to recommend. That said, having a dash cam can help prevent your rates from going up after an accident, which could provide substantial savings in the long run. According to two 2021 studies by The Zebra, a no-fault accident will increase your annual rate by $67. An at-fault accident? $561.

    Full group of 10 dash cams displayed on a white tabletop.

    Alex Rennie/CNN Underscored

    Considering that you’ll most likely be using it after a collision, when your adrenaline is pumping and your stress levels are high, it’s extremely important that your dash cam is easy to use. Taking the controls and playback functionality into account — whether that was on the camera itself or with a phone app — we judged each camera on how intuitive and straightforward it was to quickly and easily pull up and play footage.

    While installing each unit in our car, we evaluated how easy this process was, as well as if there were any additional accessories that made installation more convenient. We also noted any differences in their power cords, like if they provided additional USB ports, which could be handy if you’re already using your 12V port for your phone power. We also noted whether or not the cameras could be easily removed from their windshield mounts.

    We then drove our commute with each camera for two days, making sure to include night drives to judge their ability to capture footage in low-light conditions. We also evaluated how much space they took up on the windshield, and whether or not they were distracting or impaired our visibility.

    We judged all available methods of video playback for each camera as well. We reviewed footage on camera screens, mobile apps and any video players that could be downloaded to our computer. We evaluated each camera’s image quality during both day and night drives, doing our best to judge their ability to provide the clarity needed to identify things like license plates and street signs. We also noted how much information was provided with the footage, like GPS-enabled speed and location data.

    Finally, we took any additional features into account, like parking modes that automatically turn on the camera in the event of a hit-and-run, voice commands for hands-free use and whether or not you can zoom in during playback.

    This three-channel model provides front, rear and cabin-facing cameras, giving you about as much as you can hope for in total video coverage. The best part of this camera is the fact that the resolution of the front camera is so high — 4K 2160p — that even after you connect the other two cameras, it only drops down to a still-impressive 1440p resolution. Unfortunately, the Vantrue N4 lacks a built-in GPS, and a separate mount must be ordered to add one. This means that, out of the box, your footage lacks a record of speed or location data. Plus the Vantrue N4 also cannot connect to the Vantrue phone app, limiting playback to either the camera itself or your computer.

    Although this Vantrue model includes both a front and rear camera — a decent deal for under $200 — its strange, angled design and lack of Wi-Fi connectivity kept it firmly out of my top spot. Vantrue recommends that you mount it behind your rear-view mirror, which helps keep the bulky shape from cluttering up your windshield, but also means that you can’t really see the screen or use any controls unless you remove it from the mount. This would be less of a hassle if you could view footage and use the controls via the Vantrue phone app, but since the S1 lacks any Wi-Fi capabilities, you’re out of luck. It does have GPS though, so you will have speed and location data when viewing footage on the Vantrue Video Player on your computer.

    The smallest camera with a screen that I tested, this 1 3/4-inch-square Vantrue model had a modern, minimal look, and took up almost no room on my windshield. This did make it difficult to make out any details while replaying footage on the tiny screen, though. Footage viewed on the Vantrue mobile app was crisp and clear, although the app did require me to connect and re-connect every time the car turned off, which wasn’t very convenient. It includes GPS, so the footage viewed on the phone app provides MPH speed and a real-time GPS map of your route during playback. It also includes a small remote that you can mount to your dash, which you can use to either take a quick photo or toggle the microphone on and off.

    The ultra-low price of the no-frills Vantrue N1 Pro could make it an attractive option for some, but its lack of Wi-Fi and GPS significantly limits its functionality. You won’t be able to use it with a mobile app, and the compact, 1-by-1.25-inch screen makes video playback even less convenient. You’ll need to use the Vantrue Video Player on your computer to view the footage on a screen large enough to really make out details. Even then, the only additional data you’ll get is the date and time — no location data. It doesn’t exactly have the sleek, high-tech look of our other models, but if you’re on a budget, it could still be a fine option.

    Another budget-friendly model, this Nextbase camera is the scaled-down version of our top pick, the Nextbase 322GW. It has close to the same image quality as its older sibling, with 1080p at 6 fps versus 1080p at 30 fps, and provides the same valuable “Parking Mode” feature. It has the same 2.5-inch screen too, but it uses push-button controls instead of a touchscreen. This wide screen is especially important because, with no Wi-Fi, the Nextbase 222 can’t connect to the Nextbase mobile app. If you’re looking for a dash cam with a screen for under $100, this is definitely the option we’d recommend.

    Nextbase 622GW

    If price is no object, and your priority is maximum video coverage, this Nextbase dual-channel camera could be just what you’re looking for. The beefed-up older sibling of the Nextbase 322GW, this camera includes a front and rear camera, as well as a 128GB SD card, something not always included with a dash cam. Its 4K image quality is about as high as you’re going to find on any dash cam, and will allow you to make out more details in playback footage than any other model. We were especially impressed with the “enhanced” night vision capabilities, which made low-light footage crisp and clear, whether you’re watching on the camera screen, mobile app or the Nextbase Video Player on your computer.

    Garmin Tandem

    This screenless Garmin camera provides both front- and cabin-facing cameras, but with a frustrating mobile app and no dedicated video player for your computer, its playback options are limited. Of course, just like any camera, you can simply remove the SD card and download footage to your computer that way, but for nearly $300, we expected a bit more functionality. Our biggest issue with this model was the fact that after 24 hours, unsaved files are deleted. This can be extended to seven days with a $5 monthly subscription, or 30 days for $10 per month, but considering the already-high price and the fact that no other cameras have this limitation, the extra cost might be a dealbreaker.

    This tiny screenless camera is by far the smallest model I tested, and could be a suitable option if you want to ensure you have minimal distractions while driving. If you install the wires well, it could be completely hidden behind your rear-view mirror. The Garmin mobile app is used to adjust controls and play back video, but its frequent Wi-Fi connection issues and frustrating wait times spent sitting in your car waiting for files to download were the primary reason it wasn’t considered as a top pick. It also includes the same unfortunate 24-hour storage limitation as the Garmin Tandem. It does feature voice controls though, which are convenient for saving files or taking a photo while keeping your hands on the wheel.

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • The best over-ear headphones of 2022 | CNN Underscored

    The best over-ear headphones of 2022 | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    If you’re looking for the best sound quality, noise canceling, and you demand all-day comfort (or you just don’t like the feel of earbuds), a great pair of over-ear wireless headphones is what you need.

    We’ve put the latest and greatest full-size headphones to the test, checking out sound quality, usability, comfort and features to find the best over-ear headphones for you, whether you’re looking for something to shut out the world at work, a compact travel companion, or just something stylish, dependable and comfortable for everyday listening.

    The best wireless over-ear headphones overall

    The Sony WH-1000XM5 improves on the XM4, with a slimmer design and refined noise-canceling microphones — it’s the best over-ear Bluetooth headphone you can buy right now. XM4 owners have little reason to upgrade, but for anybody else the XM5s are the high-end headphones to get.

    Sony has held the top spot on our best noise-canceling headphones and continues to sit securely atop our best wireless headphones rankings as well. The WH-1000XM5’s active noise cancellation (ANC) continues to be some of the best around, turning most of the audible chaos of everyday life into a blissfully quiet hum, and when you add in the great sound and call quality, comfort, sleek design and solid app support, it adds up to a hard-to-beat package.

    The new model improves on the older XM4 with an improved processor and set of microphones for active noise cancellation, improved call quality, slightly faster charging time, automatic ANC optimization and a slightly sleeker design. Sound quality is as it was in the last generation — and that’s a good thing, since it was already one of the best-sounding headphones we’d tested, with rich, balanced sound that highlighted the tiniest details across all the genres we listened to during our testing, from sensitive acoustic tracks to booming pop to searing hardcore.

    The XM5s sound great out of the box, but you can customize them to your liking via the Sony headphones app for iOS or Android. The app’s equalizer lets you choose from a number of presets (which do things like boost the bass or provide a quieter mix), and those willing to get into the nitty-gritty can also make their own sound profiles. You can also take advantage of immersive 360 Reality Audio — Sony’s proprietary spatial audio tech that places sound all around you — on supported apps such as Tidal, Deezer and Amazon Music, as well as Sony’s high-resolution LDAC streaming format.

    Battery life is impressive — we got 34 hours, or five straight days of all-day use before the battery gave out. And when you do run out of juice, a quick-charge features gets you 3 hours of playback time from a 3-minute charge cycle.

    None of these features would make any difference if they weren’t comfortable to wear. And the XM5’s supple, spacious faux-leather earcups and lightweight frame make them a delight to wear throughout walks, subway rides and full days of work in the home office. They also look great, with an understated design in either black or silver that slims down the headband from the previous-gen model. It’s only a fraction of a pound lighter, but the entire design is much sleeker overall. And the slim mesh carrying case keeps the WH-1000XM5 safe when it’s time to stash them away.

    The best noise-canceling over-ear headphones

    Perfect for commuting, the office, long flights or just around the house, the Bose 700 combines Bose’s industry-leading ANC with great sound and a new, more comfortable and stylish slimmed-down design.

    The best over-ear wireless headphones for Apple users

    Now priced less stratospherically, the great sounding AirPods flagship headphones integrate seamlessly with your Mac and iPhone, let you access Apple’s nifty Spatial Audio pseudo-surround format, and impressive noise cancelation and great controls make these solid all-day companions.

    The best over-ear wireless headphones for audiophiles

    This latest update to the Bowers & Wilkins Bluetooth flagship offers superb sound and great build quality in a package that should appeal to those looking for sound quality above all else in a wireless headphone.

    The best budget over-ear wireless headphones

    While the sound isn’t as refined and they aren’t as comfy as our main recommendations, the Elite 85h gives you great sound and effective noise canceling for about half the price, along with great build quality and simple, easy to use controls.

    If you’re like most of us, if you’re considering spending upwards of $300 on a set of headphones you want something that can cover all the bases: active noise cancellation, or ANC; a stable Bluetooth wireless connection that works with all of your stuff (hopefully with fast switching; support for all of your favorite audio formats; integration with the operating system you use, whether iOS or Android; and an app that lets you manage it all without too much frustration. And you need it to be comfortable to wear all day and to pack up small enough to take with you wherever you go.

    Luckily, most major manufacturers have been trying to hit this target for a few years now, and they’ve largely succeeded. The latest wireless flagships from Sony, Bose, Apple, Sennheiser, Bowers & Wilkins, Jabra and others mostly do it all, and frankly they all sound pretty good too (with some differences in how they’re voiced) so the choice comes down to what integrates best with your stuff (or gives you the most options) and what feels good and sounds good to you.

    The best wireless over-ear headphones overall

    The best noise-canceling over-ear headphones

    Best over-ear wireless headphones for Apple users

    The best over-ear wireless headphones for audiophiles

    The best budget over-ear wireless headphones

    Battery llfe

    30 hours

    20 hours

    20 hours

    30 hours

    36 hours

    Fast charging

    3 hours of playback in 3 minutes

    3.5 hours of playback in 15 minutes

    1.5 hours of playback in 5 minutes

    7 hours of playback in 15 minutes

    5 hours of playback in 15 minutes

    Microphones

    8 (8 for ANC; 4 for calls)

    8 (6 for ANC; 4 for calls)

    9 (8 for ANC; 3 for calls)

    6 (4 for ANC; 2 for calls)

    8 (4 for ANC; 6 for calls)

    Multi-device pairing

    Yes (2 devices, Bluetooth multipoint)

    Yes (2 devices, Bluetooth multipoint)

    Yes (automatic source switching via iCloud)

    Yes (2 devices, Bluetooth multipoint)

    Yes (2 devices, Bluetooth multipoint)

    Colors available

    Black, white

    Black, Luxe Silver

    Space Gray, silver, green, pink, sky blue

    Blue, black, gray

    Black, copper, Gold Beige, navy blue, Titanium Black

    Weight

    0.55 pounds

    0.56 pounds

    0.85 pounds

    0.68 pounds

    0.65 pounds

    Price

    $398



    $379



    $449.99



    $399



    $180.52

    To find the best over-ear headphones, our testers have put the leading models available through a set of listening tests as well as using them everyday over several months, focusing not just on sound quality, but on functionality, usability and comfort — the issues that are so important to most users.

    We carefully examined design elements, studied every physical control and application interface element, tested active noise cancellation, transparency, equalization and virtualization software options and noise isolation, timed battery life and charge time and read up on warranties.

    Throughout the process, we compared each headphone carefully with its competitors, new models, and previous favorites to get the best sense of how the models we tested stacked up to the field.

    Comfort and build quality

    We wore the headphones for an extended period of time to determine whether it provided enough adjustability and whether the headband’s clamping force was too weak, too strong, or just right, and whether the ear cups allowed enough room or felt tight over time. We also considered weight, bulk and style.

    We also looked carefully at the quality of the materials used, how clean construction was, and how well assembled each headphone was. We also looked at how compact each model folded, and at case materials and construction.

    We assessed how well the ANC software and hardware of each pair of headphones dampened environmental sound. We created two noisy conditions to test: running on a treadmill with a TV on high volume nearby and sitting next to an active washing machine; later testing added a kitchen hood fan and window air conditioner. This section also required intensive cross-comparison to figure out which headphones were dampening more sound, and what range of sound was being affected.

    In addition to personal favorites our testers knew well, we used a baseline set of well-engineered contemporary songs, including acoustic, electric, and electronic music, so we could easily establish direct comparisons, this included “Bad Guy” by Billie Eilish, “Royals” by Lorde, “Jazz Crimes” by Joshua Redman, “I’m on Fire” by Bruce Springsteen and “Neon Lights” by Molotov Jukebox, “Let Me In” by Laminate Pet Animal and “Might Be Right” by White Reaper.

    We listened carefully for how well each headphone reproduced bass and revealed midrange and treble detail, as well as how realistic a soundstage it created, as well as overall clarity, paying special attention to whether noise cancelation and transparency modes interacted with or interfered with the overall sound. And for headphones that used virtual surround modes, we assessed the realism and usefulness of the included effects.

    We tested each physical control to find out whether the user interface of each model was easy to understand and how intuitive it was to control playback, calls, volume, Bluetooth pairing and features like ANC and transparency modes. We paid equal attention to companion apps, examining the extended settings available and how intuitive and useful the software was in daily use.

    We paired each headphone with multiple Apple, Android, and Windows devices, assessing ease of pairing and switching between multiple devices (where that was supported) as well as speed of reconnection and carefully noting range and latency.

    To check battery life, we used a long playlist and following a full charge to capacity, ran each headphone to exhaustion at normal listening level (75% volume) with ANC on and off. We also used them as part of our daily routines, charging them to capacity and then using them for work and commute until exhaustion to get a sense of how many days of real-world use they would support. After exhausting the battery, we also double checked quick-charge features, testing to see if we could get the claimed battery life.

    We researched what the warranty covered for each device., what period it covered, and whether extended warranties or service plans were available.

    2-underscored best over ear headphones lead

    CNN

    The Beats Studio3 Wireless are a great set of headphones overall, and are the latest update to the model that sparked today’s interest in high-end headphones for regular people. They integrate seamlessly with Apple devices, switching automatically between your Macs, iPhones and iPad, so they do make a good less-expensive alternative to the AirPods Max if the design and feel works for you. We loved the sound and look, though compared to newer designs from Sony and others they aren’t as comfortable, and we found the physical control button loud and clicky.

    Bang & Olufsen Beoplay H9

    The Beoplay H9 are expensive — in the same neighborhood as the AirPods Max — but do impressive sound quality with solid bass and a wide soundstage, along with good active noise cancellation. And though they have a beautiful design and impressive build quality, we found them uncomfortable to wear for long periods, and their touch controls frustrating to use. And call quality wasn’t great — recipients consistently reported hearing an echo of themselves.

    $329 at Bose and Amazon

    The Bose QuietComfort 45 offers the same great noise canceling as the Bose 700, in a more traditional package with lots of physical controls in place of the 700’s touch controls. The build quality is impressive, they fold small as befits their executive-travel heritage, and they’re made for long-term comfort. They’re perfect for road warriors, but we think that most people will be happier with the Bose 700, which is more stylish and our testers found more comfortable overall.

    The JBL Live 650BTNC deliver crisp sound and a reasonably realistic soundstage for the money, though compared to your recommendations they suffer somewhat, especially on the low end, where they don’t deliver extended bass. The JBL Headphones app gives you multiple sound profiles to choose from, but they don’t overcome the 650 BTNC’s inherent character. The sleek, minimal design is attractive, but they have a lot of clamping force so they aren’t as comfortable for long wear as our main recommendations. But they’re available at a deep discount, and if you’re looking for something to use occasionally they may fit the bill.

    The Poly (formerly Plantronics) BackBeats Pro 2 has decent overall sound quality but lacked bass extension and didn’t produce a wide-sounding soundstage. Call quality was relatively poor, with one recipient describing it as sounding like we were underwater. But they are comfortable to wear, and they have a fun-to-use rotary volume control.

    The updated Sennheiser Momentum 4 drop the retro styling of their predecessors for a more vanilla look, but improved ANC, a solid app and great sound make them a compelling choice for headphone aficionados.

    Skullcandy Crusher ANC

    The $319.99 Skullcandy Crusher ANC were our least favorite among those we tested. A dedicated bass boost slider on one of the cups lets you go from thin bass response to skull-rattling boom, but it felt like a gimmick, adding clutter to the mix but not definition. Using the Skullcandy app gave us access to some better-sounding sounding custom profiles, but given that the Crusher wasn’t especially comfortable to wear, we’d look at one of our other recommendations at this price..

    These were our previous favorites, and if you’re looking to save $50, they sound just as good as the newer WH-1000XM5s. That said, we think the better ANC and call quality of the revised model is worth the extra money, but if that stretches the budget too far these are still a good option. Like the newer Sonys, the XM4 offers great sound, long battery life, and very effective noise canceling (and you control them with the same useful, full-featured app).

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • The best robot mops in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    The best robot mops in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    A robot mop — much like a robot vacuum, but armed with a water tank and microfiber cloths or mop pads that wipe your floor in place of or in addition to a dust bin — can be incredibly useful as part of your regular cleaning.

    We tested eleven models — three dedicated mops and eight mop-vacuum hybrids — to find the most effective and efficient automated assistants to help you keep your floors clean.

    Best robot mop overall

    The compact, inexpensive iRobot Braava Jet 240 is simply the best robot mop for the money. While it doesn’t have the smarts of more expensive models and can’t do double duty as a vacuum, its efficient design and simple pattern-based navigation deliver impressive cleaning.

    Best robot vacuum and mop combo

    The Bissell SpinWave 2-in-1 Robotic Mop and Vacuum is an attractive and capable robot mop-vacuum with good performance, Wi-Fi connectivity and superior mopping ability to the other hybrid models we tested.

    Best luxury robot vacuum and mop combo

    The Ecovacs Deebot X1 Omni offers the best hands-off cleaning experience and fast and accurate mapping, and won’t mop your carpeting. The cleaning station empties the robot’s dustbin, cleans its mop and refills the water tank.

    For the price, the iRobot Braava Jet 240 is the best robot mop we tested. For keeping your hard floors neat and tidy without you having to manually mop every day, the iRobot Braava Jet 240 is a handy, affordable tool to have in your cleaning closet.

    The iRobot Braava Jet 240 won our hearts with its compact design before we even started mopping. It’s small, lightweight (3 pounds) and has a handle so you can easily carry it from room to room. Its low 3.3-inch profile allows it to get under furniture and into hard-to-reach places, while the squared-off edges mean it can get into corners and along baseboards in a way that round robots just can’t. It even did a good job maneuvering around a toilet base. It also uses a removable rechargeable battery so there’s no need to take up valuable floor space with a charging dock.

    Despite its small size, the Braava Jet 240 delivered a big clean. With a vibrating cleaning head (like our favorite affordable hybrid, the Bissell SpinWave) and the ability to use cleaning solution (iRobot’s solution only) in the water tank, the Braava Jet 240 actually mops the floor rather than simply using a cloth to wipe it down with water. The robot uses proprietary cleaning pads (available in both disposable and washable varieties) that, when attached to the bottom of the robot, tell it which cleaning mode to begin. There are three cleaning modes to choose from: dry sweeping, damp sweeping and wet mopping.

    The iRobot Braava Jet 240 comes with a set of mop pads tailored to the different cleaning modes; swapping in and out is simple and tidy using the eject button.

    Even though the robot isn’t Wi-Fi-connected and lacks smart features (you can, if you like, control the robot via Bluetooth from the iRobot Home app), it uses an efficient cleaning pattern that covers the whole kitchen floor, especially along the baseboards. The Jet 240 impressively maneuvered around a hallway carpet, cleaning the open floor alongside it while avoiding ever going onto the carpet. This is something many of the more expensive, advanced hybrid robot mops could not do. If you need to, you can create a virtual “wall” to confine the Braava Jet 240 to a single space just by pushing two buttons on the robot itself — very convenient indeed.

    It did great on tile and hardwood floors, leaving no streaks as it cleaned up cat-litter-dusted paw prints, though on a tile floor we noticed some water accumulation on some of the grout, as the cleaning pads don’t apply enough pressure to reach into crevices. It dried quickly but it’s not clear the grout is getting as clean as the floor is. And while it couldn’t handle dried dirt and tougher stains as well, none of the robot mops excelled in that area.

    Bissell SpinWave 2-in-1 Robotic Mop and Vacuum

    The Bissell SpinWave 2-in-1 Robotic Mop and Vacuum is the only robot mop we tested in this category that uses dual spinning pads, which were far more effective in our testing than the standard flat mop pads employed on the other models. The SpinWave did a great job getting up dirt and splatter spots from my tile kitchen floor and didn’t leave streaks on the hardwood floors. It was the only model that didn’t make me feel like my kitchen had just been lightly Swiffered with a damp cloth.

    While all the other robots we tested call for using only plain water in the water tank, the SpinWave can use cleaning products, and Bissell includes a trial size bottle of multi-surface floor cleaner in the box (you can buy other floor- and task-specific formulations through the Bissell app or online, like pet multi-surface with Febreze, wood floor cleaner and one for tough messes and odors).

    The SpinWave has sensors to help it automatically detect and avoid carpeting when it’s mopping. This wasn’t perfect — it did end up mopping onto the edge of a dining room carpet — so if you’re using it in an open-floor-plan home with a mix of hardwood or tile surfaces and carpeting, we recommend keeping an eye on it if you’re running it through the whole house (we carried it from kitchen to bathroom for mopping sessions).

    You’ll need to swap tanks (the robot comes with a dry tank for vacuuming and a wet tank for mopping) to use the SpinWave as a vacuum and a mop. You can’t do both at the same time as you can with some of the more expensive models (though it does pick up some solid debris while mopping). The circular mop pads attach to the bottom of the water tank and are easily removed for washing.

    The Bissell SpinWave’s rotating mop pads did a better job than many of the simple cloth pads used on other inexpensive mops and mop-vacuum hybrids.

    In vacuum mode, the SpinWave uses a rotating brush roll and dual spinning edge brushes on the bottom to help pick up debris and pet hair in vacuum mode. I found it did a pretty good job on low-pile carpet and hardwood floors. Three suction power levels — low, mid and max — are available.

    While the SpinWave may lack the more advanced features found on pricier models, like mapping and the ability to set virtual keep-out zones, The Bissell app gives you access to some connected features like remote controls, a selection of cleaning modes and power levels and scheduled cleaning. You can also set the SpinWave to mop in auto mode, and the robot will run straight rows, or you can use spot mode for concentrated messes and spills.

    If mopping the floors is something you do regularly, and you’re looking for a hybrid model that doesn’t cost a fortune, the Bissell SpinWave 2-in-1 Robotic Mop and Vacuum is the right robot for you, delivering one of the best mopping experiences — and certainly the best experience for the money — we found in a robot mop-vac.

    Ecovacs Deebot X1 Omni

    Truthfully, no one really needs a $1,500 robot house cleaner, and it’s reasonable to ask if you should spend so much on a robot that isn’t able to wash your dishes or bring you a drink. But the Deebot X1 Omni is the best we’ve seen of a new generation of robots. Its advanced AI object detection and laser mapping really work, and it offers the most hands-off user experience I’ve ever had. Combine that with powerful vacuuming and mopping capabilities and an auto-empty docking station that cleans the mop pads and refills the water tank, and you may find yourself coming up with ways to justify spending the money.

    Choosing between the Ecovacs Deebot X1 Omni and its close competitor, the Roborock S7 MaxV Ultra, is difficult because they both performed so well in navigating and mapping as well as in our cleaning tests. Both pair their respective companies’ top-end robot with an advanced dock that auto-empties and auto-fills the robot, theoretically giving you a totally hands-off cleaning experience (at least on a daily basis; at longer intervals you’ll have to empty and refill the dock itself).

    Based on our testing, the Deebot X1 robot wins out over the Roborock S7 MaxV with a sleeker look, a smaller footprint and — significantly, since this is a major downside of cheaper robot mops — an unerring ability to detect and avoid carpets. In our testing, it got to the very edge of the carpeting and turned around each time. We wanted to give it a cat treat and say, “good robot!”

    First and foremost, the Deebot X1 does a great job mopping and vacuuming. Dual spinning mop pads provide better scrubbing capability than the flat cloth style used on other robots so that it cleans much more than surface dirt. It picked up coffee, dried ketchup and other stains better than the other robots I tested.

    The Deebot’s mix of detection systems, mapping software and effective automation and remote control really made it stand out. Mapping was a huge pain point on the other robots we tested, often taking two or three attempts to get the house mapped and even then sometimes failing or losing the map entirely. The Deebot X1 Omni, on the other hand, mapped our testing house near-perfectly in 12 minutes. This made it super easy to use the app to set rooms and to create dividers and no-go zones (though it sometimes took a few tries to rename zones and rooms within the Deebot’s app).

    Using both a Lidar scanner and an AI-backed camera system, the Deebot excelled in our testing at object avoidance. It never bumped into furniture, even in a dark room, and it made its way around obstacles like pet toys. You can also view the camera’s output as a live feed if you want to check in when you’re not home, and you can even use two-way audio if you might want to communicate with someone remotely. The floor-level perspective is great for recording video of pets (you can steer the robot remotely to get an optimal point of view). You can record 15-second clips on your phone using the app, though there’s no cloud storage (for privacy reasons) and the robot always announces when the camera has been turned on or off.

    The Deebot has its own proprietary voice assistant, Yiko (pronounced ee-Koh), which lets you give the robot more specific commands than those available through Amazon Alexa and Google Assistant (which it also supports). You can say “OK Yiko” to stop and start a mopping or vacuuming session, send it to a specific room or ask it to clean a certain area. Yiko worked well in our testing, though it occasionally responded to unrelated conversations, asking me what we wanted it to clean.

    The Ecovacs Deebot X1’s docking station is large, but it’s taller and shallower and easier to place unobtrusively in a room than the dock used by the Roborock S7 MaxV Ultra.

    The Deebot X1 Omni auto-empty docking station has tanks for both dirty and clean water, as well as one for dust and debris, making for a relatively massive unit, 5 inches taller than the corresponding Roborock S7 MaxV Ultra dock, though the Omni dock’s bags and tanks are larger in capacity, meaning you’ll have to deal with filling and emptying less often. Also, despite its taller profile, the Deebot Omni base station is not as deep as the Roborock Ultra, and the robot docks farther inside the base, taking up less space in the room. Clear tanks make it easy to see how much dirty water has been collected and when it’s time to top off the clean water container. There’s also a hidden container for extra bags and cleaning tools.

    The robot always returned to the docking station when mopping was finished, and automatically washed the mopping pads and re-filled the water tank. It also air dries the mop pads, so they don’t smell mildewy. You can set how long you’d like the drier to run but it does make a little humming noise while it’s drying.

    The Deebot X1 Omni isn’t perfect. It lacks a dedicated spot-cleaning or edge-cleaning mode (though you can use app or voice controls to have it clean a specific area, which takes a few extra steps). It only used plain water to clean; you can’t use any sort of soap or floor-cleaning solution. And, of course, it’s very expensive. But if you want near-flawless navigation and a virtually hands-off wet and dry cleaning experience, the Deebot X1 Omni delivers.

    If you’re looking to save the effort of regular manual mopping and you have a lot of hard floors, a robot mop can help you keep things clean much in the way a robot vacuum can. Like a robot vacuum, a mopping robot is best thought of as a way to make weekly or monthly cleanings easier rather than as a full-on floor care solution. Like their single-purpose vacuuming cousins, even the most high-tech robot can’t reach every corner of your home and will not replace your full-size canister vacuum or upright vacuum.

    And no mopping robot is going to get your floors as clean as a handheld mop or sponge and a little elbow grease. There’s not a whole lot of scrubbing taking place, for one thing (think Swiffer more than mop), and the majority won’t pick up sticky, greasy messes since they are only using water to clean. They do help, but you have to be realistic about your expectations.

    Hybrid robot mop-vacuums are worth it if you lack the space for both devices. All of these will work as typical robot vacuum cleaners, picking up pet hair from the floors and low pile carpeting, even under furniture, and will mop your hard floors as well, keeping the house tidy. All of the models we tested except for the most expensive occasionally mopped our carpets (if we wanted to wet-clean those, we’d rather have a carpet cleaner), so they require supervision if this is a concern, and you might want to plan on carrying them to locations where they are needed.

    Now that the next generation of home cleaning robots has entered the field, we wouldn’t recommend spending more unless you can really afford one of the next-generation models, with more complete base stations and more elaborate automation, mapping and location features.

    Mapping technology is a pain point for many of the last-generation high-end robots (like the Ecovacs Deebot T8+ and Roborock S7+) and you can’t use the high-end features you’re paying for until the mapping is done. The good news is that the next-gen robots are superb at mapping, so if you want all those features and obstacle avoidance as well as the ability to avoid carpeting while mopping, splurge on the newer Ecovacs Deebot Omni X1 or Roborock S7 MaxV Ultra. Otherwise, stick with the far less expensive iRobot Braava Jet 240, or if you want something that also vacuums, get the Bissell SpinWave.

    These more-advanced hybrid mop vacuums, like the Ecovacs Deebot X1 and Roborock S7 MaxV Ultra, really do perform as advertised, offering hands-off autonomous house cleaning once you set them up (though as with the cheaper models, you’ll still have to take care of periodic deep cleaning the old-fashioned way). But if more hands-off cleaning is what you’re looking for, these might be worth the splurge. You just need to figure out which of their features are more important to you.

    If you’re interested in the most effective robot mop — say you have more hard floors than carpets and don’t mind attaching the mopping pads when you want to mop — the Ecovacs Deebot Omni X1 has more useful features, like the ability to self-dry the mopping pads and an on-board voice assistant for robot control.

    If you have lots of low-pile carpeting and want a robot that’s a good vacuum and can take care of a smaller amount of mopping on a single pass through your house without having to swap out tools, get the Roborock S7 MaxV Ultra, which can lift its mop while it goes over the carpets.

    We looked at 11 models with a wide variety of features and price points and at two more full-featured next-generation units, which claim to do it all: mop, vacuum, empty the dust bin, refill the water tank and wash the mop for you.

    With each robot, we looked at how well it mopped and vacuumed, and how easily it transitioned between the two. Wi-Fi-connected robots were also judged on the effectiveness and ease of use of their apps, how well they did at mapping the house and how easy it was to define and use virtual boundaries.

    Each model was given multiple runs across mostly low-pile carpeting and hardwood floors in an approximately 1,500-square-foot home with two furry cats. We looked at how well they mopped the floor and whether they were able to detect and avoid carpeting.

    iRobot’s more advanced Braava Jet m6 adds Wi-Fi and a lot of smart features that might make sense if you also have an advanced Roomba vacuum, but from a mopping perspective it performs identically to the cheaper Braava Jet 240.

    The Braava Jet m6 has a larger water tank so you don’t have to fill it as often and the see-through tank means you always know when it needs to be refilled, but we recommend saving some money and buying the cheaper Braava Jet 240 unless you already have (or plan to buy) an I-series, S-series or 900-series Roomba and plan to use the Imprint Link feature to coordinate vacuuming and mopping between the two devices.

    More advanced smarts let the m6 map your house, understand keep-out zones, respond to voice commands and navigate obstacles and stairs. It will dry sweep or wet mop floors, like the 240, and you can adjust how much water or cleaning solution it sprays as it goes. It cleans the room in efficient, neat rows and covers every inch of the floor, including edges without ever going on carpeting. It can also target specific areas within a room and head back to the dock to recharge when necessary.

    The Roborock S7 MaxV Ultra (which combines the Roborock S7 MaxV robot vacuum and the Ultra self-cleaning docking station) is a next-generation home cleaning system that competes directly with (and cleans just as well as) the Ecovacs Deebot X1 Omni. Like that system, once you set up the S7 MaxV Ultra, you shouldn’t have to deal with it until you need to fill or change out tanks in the docking station, meaning you can let it work on its own for weeks at a time. The Ultra dock is currently out of stock, but should be available in May; if you can’t wait, the S7 MaxV Plus (including Auto-Empty Dock) is available at Amazon and Roborock for $1,159.99.

    The Roborock has many of the same features as the Deebot X1, such as advanced, AI-based object and obstacle detection using a combination of Lidar and optical cameras; a livestreaming camera that lets the robot do double duty as a mobile security camera and fast and accurate home mapping. It is a big jump in technology and features from the Roborock S7+.

    While on the Deebot X1 you need to swap out tools when you want to mop, you can leave the mopping pads on the S7 MaxV and it can transition from vacuuming mode to mop mode automatically during a single run, so long as your carpet isn’t too deep. This feature (called “VibraRise”) was introduced on the last-generation high-end Roborock units like the S7+ and it lifts the mop brushes by 5mm when it senses low-pile carpeting so it doesn’t mop the carpet as it vacuums. If the carpet is taller than that and the mop heads are still attached, the S7 MaxV simply avoids it, much as the Deebot X1 would during a mopping run. The mop pad is also lifted off the floor as the robot charges so it air dries (the Ultra dock doesn’t have a forced-air dry function like the Deebot X1’s Omni dock).

    In practice, the Roborock S7 MaxV Ultra system was reasonably effective, though neither the Roborock or the Ecovacs can really clean every floor surface in your whole house in a single pass unless you have the specific mix of low-pile carpet and hard floors that the Roborock is designed for. The S7 MaxV Ultra did a really nice job on hardwood floors, mopping the whole width of the pad and leaving no streaks, something the less-expensive robots had difficulty with.

    The Ultra Empty Wash Fill Dock is very large and bulky, made of black plastic, and leaves the three tanks exposed rather than hidden away as on the Deebot Omni dock, and it’s just not as pleasing a design aesthetically. The water tanks are not see-through either, so to check the water levels, you need to pull them out and open them up to see in. The power cord in the back is very thick and long and there’s not enough space behind the dock to coil it, making it difficult to push it up against a wall. You’ll need a lot of clearance for this massive cleaning system, even given that it has less capacity than the Ecovacs system.

    For now, despite the very useful VibraRise system, for most households we’d give the edge in next-generation robot mop-vacuuming hybrid technology to the Ecovacs Deebot X1 Omni

    The Roborock S7+, the company’s previous top-of-the-line unit, doesn’t have the advanced AI object-avoidance capabilities or security camera functions of the new S7Max Ultra, but it’s about as good as previous-generation models get.

    The S7+ vacuums well, with increased suction as it detects carpeting. The robot uses “Sonic Mopping,” a function that vibrates the mopping pad very quickly (the company claims 3,000 vibrations per minute) to break up dirt. In our testing this wasn’t able to handle dried dirt or greasy spills, but it does have a useful “high intensity mopping” mode for better spot cleaning.

    As the S7+ passed over carpeting the indicator light on the robot changed from blue, for mopping mode, to white, for vacuum mode, though our carpets did get ever-so-slightly damp. This wasn’t out of line with our expectations since the function is only meant to work with very low-pile carpets. The auto-empty dock adds simplicity and convenience to using the robot. It automatically empties the robot’s dust bin when it returns to the charging station.

    Though it uses Lidar navigation to efficiently map the house, it had trouble getting started. Initially, it wanted to go through the same room a few times while never making it to the bedroom, and if it needed to go back to recharge, it started the mapping process over. It did finally complete a map, and we were able to use the app to set no-mop zones and cleaning schedules, as well as adjust suction power of the vacuum and the amount of water flow when mopping. Like with other robots, you can create invisible walls and see the route the robot is taking.

    The S7+ is available with a slightly simpler auto-empty dock, which the company claims you shouldn’t have to manually empty for up to 8 weeks (depending, of course. on how dirty your house gets, how many pets you have and how much they shed, and so forth).

    The Roborock S7+ is a really good, well-designed hybrid robot with unique features but the $949 price tag is too high compared to the equally capable Ecovacs Deebot T8+ which sells for $200 less. You can buy just the S7 robot for $649 if you can live without the self-emptying feature.

    Like the Roborock S7+, the Ecovacs Deebot T8+ is a capable hybrid robot mop-vac with an auto-empty station. It can vacuum and mop at the same time using separate dry and wet tanks. You can run it with or without the mop attachment on.

    Ecovacs says the T8 can automatically detect and avoid carpeting when the mopping pad is on, but it didn’t always detect them in my testing. Since it can’t raise its mop like the Roborock can, it wound up mopping parts of the carpets before we pulled it away.

    It automatically boosts the suction power when it’s vacuuming carpeting and does a good job picking up pet hair. It’s quiet and handles door sills better than other models and does a good job maneuvering around furniture.

    The Auto-Empty Station is smaller than the Roborock’s, though it will still hold about 8 weeks worth of debris, depending on usage. It worked well, but we did have one instance of cat hair getting stuck in the suction tube and we had to clean it out by hand.

    Like with other connected robots, once you map your home, you can set scheduled cleanings, create boundaries and virtual walls and control the water flow in each room while mopping. And just like other connected robots, mapping was an exercise in frustration. It took multiple tries, going over the same rooms and recharging over and over until it finally completed.

    The iLife A11 does only an average job cleaning. It did well picking up cat hair but left some cat litter on the bathroom floor. It also left some hair on low-pile carpeting. This won’t replace your standalone vacuum, but for a scheduled quick run through the house in between deeper cleanings, this will get the job done.

    As with most last-generation robots, the A11 can map your home, and be controlled via an app or by a hardware remote. Also as is usual, the mapping process can be frustrating but once you complete it, it will store up to three maps in memory. You can set zones, so the robot mops in one zone and only vacuums in another. The A11 also has Lidar-based smart navigation to avoid objects in its path.

    Its two-in-one dustbin holds both water and debris so it can vacuum and mop in a single pass. The two-in-one dustbin can be replaced with a larger, dedicated dust bin if you just want to use the A11 as a vacuum.

    The app lets you adjust power and mode while vacuuming and mopping. You can increase the suction of the vacuum from eco to standard to turbo and adjust the amount of water that is dispensed in mopping mode. You can do the same on the remote control, along with switching between edge mode and spot clean.

    One warning: it doesn’t come with a protective base to keep things dry under the robot while docked, so you’ll want to take off the mopping cloth after each use if your charging base is on a wood floor.

    The iLife Shinebot W450 does a good job mopping floors, but it didn’t perform as well as the similar iRobot Braava Jet m6 or cheaper and simpler Braava Jet 240. It’s a mopping robot with smart navigation and an app that lets you adjust cleaning modes and target the area you want cleaned, but at 11 inches round and 4.7 inches high, it’s not going to get under furniture, near baseboards, under cabinets and around toilets.

    In addition, for a robot that’s supposed to simplify your life, it requires way too much work to use it. You’ll have to open the robot to access and fill the tank, and it’s difficult to put back together (we managed to spill a tank of water on the floor). Once charged, in order to start a cleaning run, you need to manually lift it off its charging base and place it on the floor you want cleaned. It has a handle to carry and move it, but it can’t start itself or return to the dock to recharge on its own.

    It’s really too bad, as once the W450 gets to cleaning it does a good job. It has two tanks, one to collect dirty water and one for clean water so it’s not just pushing dirt around. First it sprays (water and cleaning fluid, if you’re using it) then it scrubs with a roller brush, sucks away the dirty water and wipes off any residue water, so your floors dry really quickly. Of course, then you have to empty and wash the dirty water tank when it’s done.

    The V8s is an older model in the iLife product line, and has dropped in price to where it no longer feels overpriced for what it can and can’t do. That said, while it is a capable mop, as a hybrid it has trouble navigating around carpet, and you are better served confining it to your kitchen or other hard-floored rooms, or sticking with a dedicated mop robot. As a vacuum, it’s actually a good hard-floor pet hair option because of its suction tube design, but the lack of roller brushes means it can’t handle low-pile carpet, cutting into its potential versatility.

    In our open-plan test home, the V8s did a good job mopping the kitchen floor, but unfortunately, as it went from kitchen to dining room to living room (transitioning from hardwood floors to low-pile carpeting), it couldn’t detect the low-pile carpeting and went right over it, squirting water along the way.

    This iLife robot uses a suction tube, much like a traditional vacuum cleaner, rather than the roller or bristle brushes used on other robots. This lets it do a better job than some of the other models we tested at cleaning up pet hair, as the debris is sucked up right into the bin without getting tangled up in a roller brush. It does great on hardwood and tile floors, but the downside of having no roller brush is that it doesn’t do a very thorough job on low pile carpeting.

    It can’t vacuum and mop in a single pass, so you have to swap out the dustbin and water tank each time you change modes. It also doesn’t come with a floor mat so if you leave it on the charging base with the water tank attached you might end up with water stains on your floor. We recommend putting in the dust tank and letting the water tank empty and dry between uses.

    The Eufy RoboVac X8 Hybrid is a Wi-Fi-connected robot mop-vacuum hybrid with high-end features like smart navigation and in-app mapping and scheduling, but it only does an average job vacuuming and mopping. To make space for the water tank, the dust bin is slightly smaller than in the standalone X8 vacuum we reviewed in our test of the best robot vacuums, and the mop functionality is lacking. There are no mop-specific controls so you can’t adjust how much water is put down for a specific task.

    Mapping was frustrating and inconsistent. While you can create no-go zones to keep the mop off your carpeting, these didn’t persist in memory during our testing, and were ignored as the robot ran.

    In its favor, the Eufy X8 Hybrid lets you mop and vacuum in a single pass, which certainly makes it more efficient. Some of the other units require you to swap out the dust bin and water tank each time you change from vacuum to mop, and it includes a translucent mat to protect your floor if you keep the mop cloth on while charging the device.

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • The best air mattress in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    The best air mattress in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    You may not use an air mattress often, but when the time comes, you’ll want one that’s reliable, comfortable, and easy to inflate and store. You don’t want to struggle to set it up, you need it to be supportive enough to provide a good night’s rest and the last thing you or your guests want is to wake up in the middle of the night, floundering in a half-deflated blob of vinyl.

    We set out to find the best air mattress, putting seven top models to the test, judging them on their comfort while sleeping, as well as their overall usability when it comes to setting up, inflating, deflating, and storage. If you haven’t shopped for an air mattress in a while, you’ll be surprised to find how comfortable and convenient they are nowadays, but even among this impressive group we found an outstanding choice that should make you and your guests happy.

    The Best Air Mattress Overall

    In addition to providing the most comfortable night’s sleep during testing, the King Koil Luxury Air Mattress uses a built-in pump for quick and convenient inflation, and features a raised pillow that helps mimic the feel of a real bed.

    Alex Rennie/CNN Underscored

    While many of the air mattresses I tested were similar in design, pump operation, and dimensions, the King Koil Luxury Air Mattress was a clear winner when it came to overall comfort. Not only does it feature a soft, velvety flocking covering the top, it’s designed with a raised pillow area on one end. This area provides just enough head and neck support to mimic the effect of a headboard, making it feel much more like a real bed to me than any other option.

    The King Koil Luxury Air Mattress provided a comfortable amount of full-body support as well. I’ll admit, the “coil-beam construction” sounded a bit gimmick-y, but these internal, air-filled coils seemed to work as advertised. They really provided the ideal amount of support for me, mimicking a real mattress more convincingly than the other mattresses we tested. Since these coils are spaced throughout the mattress, edge to edge, I never felt like the sides were going to give way and cause me to roll out, which is sometimes the case in less-supportive mattresses. I did experience a small amount of deflation over my 48 hours of testing, but it was minimal enough to chalk up to standard stretching of the new material. In fact, in addition to the two nights of sleeping, I also found myself laying down on it throughout the day, just to experience the comfort and support.

    At 20 inches high, the King Koil Luxury Air Mattress is convenient to climb into at night, and more importantly, comfortable to roll out of in the morning. Air mattresses that are lower to the ground were just more difficult to get into and out off, and the process involved more grunting and bending than we were prepared to do first thing in the morning. This was definitely not the case with the King Koil.

    Image of the side of a King Koil air mattress, showing the built-in pump mechanism

    The pump was both easy to use and quick to fill, fully inflating the mattress in just 1 minute 50 seconds. You simply twist the valve you want to use—either inflate or deflate—press the power switch and you’re all set. The power cord also conveniently stores inside a little storage cubby with a latching door, keeping everything nice and tidy when it’s time to store the mattress away.

    As for storage, despite its luxurious height and internal structure the King Koil packs up very tidily into a storage sack small enough to tuck into the back of a closet. Some competitors were stiff and difficult to fold up easily, and others were too large even folded away into their stuff sacks to store away easily.

    A King Koil air mattress folded down to its storage size.

    The materials used in the mattress and pump appear to be of high quality, and I never felt like any elements or components were flimsy, loose, or weak. Deflation was a breeze as well, taking just 1 minute 50 seconds to go from full to completely empty. It took me less than a minute to fold it up and slide it back into the included storage bag too, thanks to the illustrated instructions in the manual.

    A packed King Koil air mattress in its storage bag, sitting on a living room floor, watched over by a small brown and white dog seated on a couch.

    The King Koil Luxury Air Mattress is not cheap relative to the competition, but the overall comfort, build quality and speedy inflation makes it worth the money.

    How do you take care of an air mattress?

    Even high-quality air mattresses won’t last forever, but there are things you can do to extend their lifespan. Make sure to not only avoid punctures by keeping your pets off the bed—even small dogs can have sharp toenails that can puncture or scratch through an air mattress—but also avoid unnecessary pressure by preventing rambunctious kids from jumping or walking on it. This extra pressure can place more stress on the seams, causing splits and cracks over time. Insta-bed also advises you to avoid placing the mattress against the wall, to avoid hidden carpet tacks.

    You should also take the time to vacuum your mattress after every use. Accumulated crumbs and other small debris can also pose a potential puncture threat, especially when you’re folding it up and squeezing it down during deflation.

    The most important thing to remember is that cold temperatures can make vinyl stiffen, so if it’s being stored in a cool area, like a basement or attic, make sure to allow your air mattress to come to room temperature before inflating. If not, the vinyl may lack the flexibility it needs to expand safely, which can cause cracks or splits in the material. The Insta-bed manual also recommends this warming up period after your bed is delivered to your doorstep, since it could have been sitting outside for longer than you think.

    If your bed does get damaged, it’s not a lost cause. Every mattress I tested included a patch kit for leaks, which, if applied properly, can easily fix the problem. And should your built-in pump go haywire, some mattresses allow you to still fill them manually with a separate pump.

    Yes, you can take an air mattress camping. If you’d prefer to sleep well off the ground and not have to worry about roots and uneven ground impairing your sleep, they could be a great choice. However, you’ll need to be aware of their limitations and the effects they may have on your trip.

    First, since air mattresses are extremely vulnerable to punctures, you won’t want to lay it directly on the ground, and take care to keep it clear of stray campfire embers that could melt the vinyl. While patching holes is a solution, it’s not really a project that’s ideal to perform out in the wilderness. Keep in mind that you can just as easily puncture your mattress when it’s folded up, so don’t pack it with sharp objects. Air mattresses are also relatively heavy, and depending on how long you plan on carrying them to your site, this weight can be more trouble than it’s worth.

    Perhaps most importantly, you’ll need to make sure you have a reliable way to inflate your air mattress. If you want to take advantage of the convenience and quick performance of built-in pumps, you’ll need to have a power source, like a car cigarette lighter, or a campsite power hookup. If you’ll be away from electricity, you’ll need to go with a mattress that comes with a battery-powered pump, like the Intex Dura-Beam Standard Single-High Air Mattress, or a mattress with a manual foot pump. If these limitations sound like they won’t work with you and your trip, you’ll probably be better off with a camping pad.

    To help better understand the benefits and drawbacks of the air mattresses we tested, we ran each mattress through a comprehensive battery of real world tests, from setup to packing and unpacking and, of course, sleeping, evaluating them across a range of criteria but focusing on comfort and convenience.

    Since air mattresses are frequently set up in areas not typically used for a bed, and sometimes last-minute, it’s really important that they’re easy to use. Nobody wants to fumble around with a confusing air pump or have to go digging for an instruction manual when you just want to get to sleep. I paid close attention to how simple—or complicated—each mattress was to operate, from unboxing, to setup, inflation, deflation, and finally storage. Specifically, I noted any specific issues with the pump operation controls, and the helpfulness of each mattresses instruction manual.

    To accurately judge each mattress on the most important measure performance — it’s comfort and support while sleeping, I slept on each model for two nights, noting both how comfortable their soft topper was, as well as overall stability. I also paid close attention to any deflation issues overnight. Although minor deflation is expected with new air mattresses—the vinyl material stretches—I did my best to notice any significant deflation that could indicate actual issues down the road. I compared each mattresses pump as well, evaluating them on how easy they were to setup, notable noise differences, and how long it took them to fully inflate the mattress.

    After testing each mattress, I then deflated, rolled (or folded) up each mattress and stored it and any pumps in their included storage bag. I noted how easy this process was from start to finish, paying attention to how well the pump deflated the mattress, if there were any included instructions that made it easier to fold up the mattress correctly, and how easy it was to fit into the storage bag.

    During all of this testing, I kept track of any issues that caught my eye when it came to build quality. Flimsy switches or valve openings, and any noticeable seam or molding issues with the vinyl or soft topper all helped me evaluate one mattress vs another.

    In addition to these testing categories, I also compared specific metrics like overall weight, the dimensions of each mattress when folded up, and warranty lengths.

    A solid runner-up, the SoundAsleep mattress gave us a comfortable, supportive night’s sleep, and was a breeze to setup and inflate. Once you unfold it, you simply plug in the power cord and turn the control dial to “inflate” and you’re all set. That’s it. The velvet topper was nice and cozy, and I could definitely tell that it had some kind of structural support inside that helped keep it’s shape. Although I did experience some deflation after two nights of sleeping, it didn’t appear to be leak-related and could be chalked up to some standard stretching of the material. The only real drawback I had was a minor design issue with the power cord storage. Unlike other mattresses that provide a small latched door to keep the folded cord inside, this mattress only provides an open hole that you just kind of cram the cord into. It’s also worth noting that this model doesn’t include instructions for folding/rolling up the mattress for storage. This was a fairly straightforward process, so certainly isn’t a dealbreaker, but a diagram could certainly come in handy if you don’t remember how it was folded when you unboxed it. This mattress is also just 18 inches high, as opposed to the 20 inches of the King Koil, which was the primary reason it didn’t take my top spot.

    If you’re extra-sensitive to changes in air mattress inflation and prefer a specific level of firmness, this is the bed for you. The “never flat” pump will automatically power on if it detects that the bed is beginning to deflate, even a small amount, pumping it back up to your desired setting. You can choose between 3 of these settings—plush, medium, and firm—and the pump will maintain that setting at all times. If you’re worried about the noise of the pump interrupting your sleep, you shouldn’t be. I’m a fairly light sleeper and never woke up once during either night, despite the mattress remaining perfectly full the entire time. I kept the mattress next to my desk during the day to monitor the pump, and when it would power on for a few moments, I was really surprised at the low noise level. The supportive structure and velvet topper was comfortable as well, making this a favorite during testing. Keep in mind that you do have to keep it plugged in at all times to take advantage of the never-flat feature, which might limit where you can place it in your room. Plus, unlike the King Koil that covers the sides of the mattress with a soft black velvet, this model has exposed vinyl all around,giving it more of an “air mattress” feel, as opposed to the King Koil, which felt more like a real bed — but this is still a very comfortable air mattress.

    If a speedy inflation time is your priority, consider this high-quality EnerPlex mattress and its built-in pump. It took just 1 minute and 21 seconds to fully inflate, which was the fastest of all the mattresses we tested. The pump itself was simple to use: you just plug it in, rotate the inflation valve to open it, and press the power button. This mattress also scored major points in overall comfort during my sleep test, and its “coil beam construction” definitely provided a good amount of support throughout the night. I also appreciated the non-skid bottom too, which kept it firmly in place when getting in and out. Its 2-year warranty is twice as long as any other mattress I tested, making it well-suited for those who plan on using it frequently. Unfortunately, its 18-inch height was noticeably less comfortable to get in and out of than the 20-inch King Koil. That being said, if the King Koil is unavailable, this mattress is a great alternative.

    Intex Dura-Beam Standard Single-High Air Mattress

    The ultra-low price and compact size of this Intex mattress makes it a great choice for campers or those who are on an extra-tight budget. I was surprised at how comfortable this model felt during the night too, and the inner support system provided more structure than I expected at this price point. That said, its 10-inch height was definitely more of a challenge to get in and out of than the taller options I tested. Although the battery-powered pump took the longest to inflate—4 minutes—it was by far the quietest among the group we tested, which might be worthwhile if noise is a concern (apartment dwellers take note). I do wish the intake valve fit the pump a bit better, as I had to continually press the valve adapter into the port the entire time it was operating. Another drawback: Intex doesn’t include the six “C” batteries required for the Dura-Beam’s pump. I had to purchase these separately, so keep that in mind if you don’t already have them on hand.

    I really enjoyed the subtle “bumpers” on the edge of this mattress, which created a cozy, secure sleeping surface, and gave me the confidence that I wouldn’t accidentally roll out in the event of overnight deflation. At 22 inches, it was also the tallest of the models I tested, which made it really easy to get out of in the morning. The internal horizontal support beams gave it a nice and sturdy feel, and provided a really comfortable sleep overall. The pump was simple to use too, with just a simple dial to rotate from side to side. The main drawback to the this mattress was its inflation time. It took the longest to fill up, 4 minutes and 10 seconds, so keep that in mind if speedy inflation is a priority. At 21 pounds it’s also the heaviest of my testing pool, though not by much.

    The Coleman GuestRest mattress, unlike most of the competition in this price range, uses an external pump, which I found much less convenient than the built-in units. While the ability to use the pump for other items could be useful to some—like if you have pool toys, inflatable kayaks, or balloons—it was extremely loud by comparison, ultimately reaching a pitch that I would describe as “screaming”, and its ill-fitting adapter required you to hold it tightly in place during the inflation process. If you anticipate having to fill up your mattress late at night, this is not the mattress for you. I did appreciate that the pump and inflation instructions were both included in the instruction manual, as well as printed on the side of the mattress itself, which would be convenient if you lose the manual. In the pump’s defense, it did fill the mattress relatively quickly, taking just 3 minutes and 37 seconds to get a nice firm mattress. It’s also nice and compact, making it convenient to store when not in use.

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • The best electric toothbrushes in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    The best electric toothbrushes in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    Good oral hygiene is important for everyone, and electric toothbrushes promise to make the process of caring for those pearly whites a whole lot easier. Built-in timers, apps and multiple brushing modes don’t just do a better job than a manual toothbrush, they also teach you to take better care of your teeth.

    To find the best electric toothbrushes, we brought in 10 electric toothbrushes and brushed our teeth — a lot — while testing every feature and consulting with dental professionals to determine which features were really helpful. Our teeth felt nice and clean at the end of the three-week testing period, and in the process we found four great models that will get your oral health dialed in.

    Best electric toothbrush overall

    Affordable, full-featured, effective and compatible with many varieties of replacement brush heads from Philips and third parties, the Sonicare 4100 is an great way to improve your oral hygiene routine. A gentle mode makes it easy for beginners to get used to high-tech brushing.

    Best smart electric toothbrush

    The Oral-B iO Series 9 offers more features and modes than any electric toothbrush we tested, from multiple modes to suit any brushing goal to a connected app that really provides useful feedback. It’s pricey, but a 60-day guarantee makes it easy to see if it will work for you.

    Best electric toothbrush for travel

    The slim, compact Philips One by Sonicare comes with a form-fitting case and has 30 days of battery life, making it the perfect electric toothbrush for travel. It doesn’t have all the features of some more expensive brushes, but offers more than enough to keep up your tooth care routine on the road.

    Best affordable electric toothbrush

    The Brightline Sonic Rechargeable Toothbrush gives you a straightforward electric toothbrush experience that won’t break the bank. Its simple feature set makes it easy to use, and it offers inexpensive brush head replacements with a subscription plan.

    Looking for an excellent electric toothbrush at an affordable price? If so, the Philips Sonicare 4100 is one of the best out there. The 4100 has been around for many years, and we found it as comfortable, easy and effective to use as more expensive models, with simple, useful features like a pressure sensor and timer that make a big difference versus traditional manual toothbrushes.

    Although the Philips Sonicare 4100 isn’t as feature-packed as some toothbrushes that cost a few hundred dollars, those extra features aren’t always needed. The Phillips offers only a single brushing mode, with low and high intensity levels. The straightforward controls let you easily change the settings as you brush. During testing, the Sonicare 4100 felt very comfortable in hand, and the brush head (several varieties are available from Philips; we tested with the supplied standard heads) was gentle against our teeth and gums, getting into those hard-to-reach places and getting our teeth sparkling clean.

    A two-minute timer reminds you to brush for the full two minutes per most dentists’ recommendations, and even better, during that time a “Quadpacer” timer vibrates every 30 seconds, guiding you to move to another quadrant of your mouth — helping to make sure all teeth are cleaned equally. You can also pause the toothbrush — for up to 30 seconds — and the timer will start off right where it left off.

    One of our favorite features of the toothbrush — and one we didn’t find with some of the other lower-priced toothbrush options — is the pressure sensor. While using an electric toothbrush, you’re meant to let the brush head do the work rather than scrubbing. So during the brushing session, if you press too hard and apply too much pressure, the Sonicare 4100 will vibrate and an indicator light will flash, giving you a warning. Dr. Mark Wolff, professor of restorative dentistry at the University of Pennsylvania, emphasized the importance of controlling the pressure while brushing since “brushing too aggressively can wear the gums and tooth structure, resulting in recession and tooth sensitivity to cold.”

    Everything on the Philips is well thought-out from a design perspective. On the backside of the toothbrush, there’s a notch to keep the toothbrush from rolling around, ensuring the brush head is always kept off the surface if lying flat. And just like most Philips products, a plastic case is included to keep the brush head clean during storage or travel.

    For those new to electric toothbrushes, the Phillips 4100 has an EasyStart feature turned on by default; this gently increases the power over the first 14 brushings. Since electric toothbrushes feel different than a manual toothbrush, this allows you — and your teeth — to adapt to the toothbrush over a week’s time.

    Other features include a brush head replacement reminder, low battery indicator, 14-day battery life and two-year warranty. The 4100’s charging base uses a USB-A connector, although a wall adapter isn’t included, so you’ll have to supply your own.

    The Philips Sonicare 4100 is one of a pair of Philips electric toothbrushes (the other is the Sonicare 4700) that has received the American Dental Association (ADA) seal of acceptance, which means that it has been evaluated for efficacy and safety by a team of independent dental and scientific experts.

    The Oral-B iO Series 9 smart electric toothbrush on a stone countertop

    The Oral-B iO Series 9 is by far the best smart toothbrush we tested, with an app that offered consistently accurate and useful feedback. The brush itself — a sleek metal unit with a colorful LCD display — offers seven different modes, the most out of any toothbrush we tested, along with the full suite of standard features such as an easy-to-view pressure sensor indicator and two-minute timer (with 30-second pulsing quadrant reminders).

    The seven modes include daily clean, intense clean, whitening, gum care, sensitive, super sensitive and tongue clean. Registered dental hygienist Nicole Barbour, who works for a practice in Newton, MA, told us that while most of the patients she sees only need a standard mode, a sensitive setting can be beneficial for those who are at higher risk for enamel wear, gingival attachment or tooth sensitivity. She also suggested that the gum care setting — when used with a compatible brush head — can help remove bacteria from the gum line. However, she did go on to say that there’s not enough independent data available as to whether or not all modes are in fact beneficial and exceed your regular standard mode. And for most patients, multiple mode options aren’t necessary.

    But if you’re a patient that has a specific oral need, this toothbrush allows you to fully personalize your brushing experience with its many modes. And while all brush heads are compatible for each mode type, you’ll receive the best experience by purchasing the Oral-B brush head specific to your selected mode.

    The oscillating brush, which rotates side to side rather than vibrating like the other brushes we tested, is much quieter than the other Oral-B toothbrushes in our test group, and we found it moved smoothly from one tooth to another. Oral-B also claims the “round brush head pulsates to loosen plaque and then oscillates and rotates to sweep the plaque away.”

    While it might seem like overkill for some, I appreciated the Oral-B’s smart features. With this feature, you can sync your toothbrush to the Oral-B app on your phone, which will guide you through your brushing session. When brushing, I found it very useful to be guided through each quadrant of my mouth and to see (via the 3D tracking feature) which surfaces and sections of my mouth weren’t brushed enough. With this app, you can either watch in real time or review your brushing later.

    On a busy morning, I find that I don’t always have the patience to truly focus on brushing my teeth properly, so this kept me in check and you might find similarly. Barbour told us that “most patients are in the habit of brushing in a way that may not be effective for plaque removal of all surfaces and using a smart app can benefit patients as they practice proper brushing technique and adaptation.” However, she did go on to say that “paying too much attention to the app can backfire if it distracts too much attention.”

    The app also tracks your total brush time and the amount of pressure for every brushing session. Barbour told us that seeing this information can help a patient make changes to their brushing habits as needed and improve efficacy. Wolff agreed and mentioned that tracking your brushing sessions and showing the history to your hygienist will allow them to “give you some customized instructions to improve your homecare.”

    Within the app, you are also given daily coaching tips based on your brushing habits to help you with future sessions. Conveniently, you don’t have to keep your phone in front of you while you brush. So long as your phone is within Bluetooth range, it will record your session. You don’t get the live guidance, but you will get the data on brushing time and pressure. We also found the accuracy of the app to be top-notch, which is not something we found with all of the other Bluetooth-compatible toothbrushes we tested. Within the app, you can also set up a brush head reminder and various challenges to ensure you are receiving the best oral care possible.

    Although it costs significantly more than most of the brushes we tested, the packaging comes with four brush heads in total, a magnetic charger that takes just three hours for a full charge and a travel case. The travel case even comes with its own plug for easy charging on the go.

    If you are looking for a toothbrush that will truly track your brushing habits — correctly — this is by far our favorite smart electric toothbrush we tested. Those who need some guidance while brushing or have specific oral health goals in mind will absolutely love this brush. But if you don’t believe you’ll use many of the capabilities or don’t have the need for guided brushing, and don’t want to have your phone with you at all times in the bathroom, then you probably don’t need to splurge on such an expensive toothbrush. You also might want to take into consideration the cost of replacement brush heads, as they are significantly more expensive than most of the models we tested at close to $10 per brush head.

    If you’re on the fence, you can try out the Oral-B iO Series 9 toothbrush for 60 days and if you aren’t happy, you can receive a full refund.

    The Philips One by Sonicare electric toothbrush on a stone countertop

    The Philips One by Sonicare is slim and incredibly compact. It comes in a form-fitting case that fits the brush perfectly and barely takes up any space in your toiletry bag, making it a great travel companion. Plus it comes in seven colors, making it easy for each member of your family to identify their own toothbrush.

    One of the best aspects of the toothbrush is that the rechargeable battery lasts up to 30 days, double or triple the battery life of most other electric toothbrushes we tested, allowing you to truly not worry about your toothbrush running out of battery while on the road. If you don’t want to have to worry about recharging the battery, you can instead opt for a battery-operated version of the Philips One toothbrush. The functionality of the toothbrush is exactly the same, although it runs on a single AAA battery, which lasts for approximately 90 days.

    No charging base is included with the rechargeable version; the toothbrush is also charged by a USB-C cable, so you can use the same charger you’d use with many phones, computers and other electronic devices. So although a USB-C charger comes with the Philips One toothbrush, if you happen to leave it at home, there’s a good chance you’ll be able to find another one in your bag (or perhaps get a loaner from the hotel’s front desk). A four-stage battery indicator lets you know how much life is left, and if you’re caught out, a full charge takes around eight hours.

    Although the brush doesn’t alert you to pressure like the Sonicare 4100, it has a two-minute timer, with a quadrant indicator that buzzes every 30 seconds as a reminder to move to the next section of your mouth. As with the larger Philips models you can also pause the toothbrush for up to 30 seconds and the timer will restart from the pausing point.

    We found the replaceable brush head to be very similar to a manual brush, with W-shaped bristles that let us get into tight spaces (Philips doesn’t offer any alternative brushes like it does for its main Sonicare lineup). The bristles were soft and gentle, leaving our teeth feeling extremely clean and much better than a manual toothbrush.

    A Brightline Sonic Rechargeable Toothbrush on a stone countertop

    The Brightline Sonic Rechargeable Toothbrush is as simple as they come. It doesn’t offer a pause-and-resume feature or a pressure indicator or convenience features like LED indicators, but it really delivers on basic performance, making it a good option for those wanting to try an electric toothbrush without breaking the bank. We found that the toothbrush was able to get into tight spaces between our teeth and the vibration was perfect. Our teeth felt sparkly clean and even after many uses, the bristles were fully intact.

    The Brightline allows you to adjust the intensity up and down to a level that works for your liking, though. Unlike some of the other toothbrushes, there is no indicator telling you that you are on a high or low setting, so you have to hold down the power button until you find by feel the intensity setting that works for you. Fortunately, the toothbrush remembers your vibration setting for your next brushing session. If you want something that gives you more visual direction, the pricier Brightline Sonic 5-Mode option has dedicated modes, from gentle to whitening, with LED indicators, but performance is similar.

    The toothbrush has a built-in two-minute timer with a 30-second quadrant reminder, although there is no pause functionality. This means if you need to take a break while brushing, the timer resets, which doesn’t allow you to keep track of the full 30-second or two-minute requirement. Brightline claims a full charge will give 25 days of use, one of the longest battery life spans of all of the toothbrushes we looked at.

    Replacement heads for this toothbrush are relatively inexpensive. The box comes with two brush heads, but you can purchase a four-pack for less than $10. At approximately $2.50 per head, this makes owning the Brightline more economical than many of the other brands.

    The only real downside is that the Brightline doesn’t have a pressure indicator — one powered toothbrush feature that is highly recommended by dental professionals we spoke to. It also doesn’t have different head options and is a little bulkier than most, but it gets the job done at an affordable price.

    Most dentists — along with the American Dental Association — recommend that all adults and children brush their teeth for two minutes twice a day to effectively remove plaque. Dr. Andrea Zandona, professor and chair of the Department of Comprehensive Care at Tufts University School of Dental Medicine, explains that this length of exposure to fluoride toothpaste “is important to achieve the best cavity protection benefits.”

    Although you can certainly brush for two minutes with a manual toothbrush, electric toothbrushes have automatic timers and pressure sensors, as well as various brushing modes that may help you do a more thorough job of brushing your teeth and gums and, most importantly, just make it easier to do a good job brushing. Basically, whatever your oral hygiene needs or goals, it’s worth making room in your bathroom for an electric toothbrush.

    The American Dental Association suggests that this is even more the case for people who have dexterity challenges — children, people with disabilities or the elderly — or those who have dental appliances such as braces.

    However, the dental professionals we consulted all reiterated that an electric toothbrush won’t do all of the work for you. You still have to use it correctly, positioning the brush at the proper 45-degree angle to your teeth and gums and gently moving the brush head with proper pressure to cover the entire tooth surface.

    Amy King, a registered dental hygienist at Chestnut Dental Associates in Needham, MA, told us that she has seen a dramatic improvement in the oral hygiene of patients who use electric toothbrushes, so long as they use them correctly and with the appropriate settings. She sees “less inflammation and less bleeding,” and that “in some cases, people who use electric toothbrushes and admit to not flossing regularly, have gums that look as good if not better than those that floss regularly.”

    During our testing, we found a few specific functions to be extremely important during our brushing sessions. Below is a description of each functionality and options to look for when considering a toothbrush.

    Built-in timer

    As we learned, brushing for a full two minutes is extremely important when brushing your teeth. Fortunately, every toothbrush we tested included a built-in two-minute timer, which allowed us to not cheat on our brushing session. Additionally, many toothbrushes also include a vibrating alert every 30 seconds that reminds you to move on to the next quadrant of your mouth, making it easier to remember to cover all of your teeth. Many toothbrushes, although not all, allow you to pause your toothbrush for up to 30 seconds without resetting the timer.

    Pressure sensor

    The pressure you apply when brushing might not be something you actively think about. You definitely don’t want to do harm to your teeth because you really only have one set. Applying too much pressure against your teeth and gums, Zandona told us, can erode the enamel on your tooth and cause gum recession, while also wearing out your toothbrush. Dr. Evan Novick, an endodontic specialist at Novick Endodontics in Charlotte, NC, told us that “multiple studies have shown anything more than light pressure does more harm than good and a pressure indicator on a toothbrush is extremely beneficial to a patient.” Fortunately, many electric toothbrushes have the capability to let you know when you are applying too much pressure.

    Brushing modes 

    All electric toothbrushes offer a brush head that vibrates or pulsates, but some offer multiple brushing modes: gum care, sensitive, whitening, pro clean and more. Depending on the brush, these modes may simply be intensity settings targeted for different brushing tasks, or in more advanced models — such as the Philips Sonicare 6100 and Oral-B iO Series 9 — these modes actually vary the pattern of a brush’s oscillating or pulsating motion, and are often designed to work with specific replacement brush heads tailored to work with those motions.

    Either way, these brushing modes let you personalize your brushing experience to address your needs. Novick told us that he feels only some of the brushing modes had real benefits. For example, the sensitive setting is ideal for someone with hypersensitive gums or for a prescribed amount of time after a dental procedure. However, he has not found any differences in the color of the teeth of patients who have used the whitening modes on their electric toothbrushes.

    Intensity levels

    Most electric toothbrushes offer multiple intensity levels. This allows you to select a low, medium or high power option, which changes the speed at which the brush head oscillates or vibrates (this is distinct from “modes,” which may change the pattern of the head’s movement).

    Many hygienists love variable intensity as it allows those new to using an electric toothbrush to ease into it and get used to the feeling. Registered dental hygienist Ana Perez, also from Chestnut Dental Associates, told us that this feature “helps patients that have very sensitive teeth or gum recession/root exposure because the toothbrush can go gentler or slower on those areas while still removing plaque and biofilm effectively.”

    Smart features

    Some of the newer, higher-end toothbrushes allow you to connect your toothbrush to an app on your phone where the app will guide you through your brushing session, the idea being that over time the feedback will teach you to be a better brusher. Many of the apps will also record data from your session, such as how long you brushed and areas of your mouth that were missed.

    Hygienist Amy King feels that these apps can be very beneficial to anyone who wants to improve their oral health. “Using an electric toothbrush app,” she says, “is like having an in-home brushing tutor and allows the patient the opportunity to practice their brushing technique and habits conveniently in the privacy and comfort of their home.” While she’s seen a lot of interest, she has found that the apps aren’t for everyone — while many of her patients use their electric toothbrushes every day, more often than not, they have stopped using the companion apps.

    King and several other hygienists also appreciated when patients brought in their historical brushing data, so check with your dentist’s office to see if that might be valuable for them.

    To help find the best options, we picked out 10 of the most popular and well-reviewed electric toothbrushes ranging from just $30 to upwards of $300. We went through the entire brushing process with each electric toothbrush — multiple times — and tested all of their functionality. We brushed every which way possible to truly put them to the test, while comparing their overall performance and effectiveness.

    So, over the course of a lot of brushing sessions, we assessed all of the brushes in the following areas.

    Installation and setup

    We checked out whether each brush ran on a battery or used a rechargeable battery, as well as whether it shipped with a base or charging cable. We measured how long the brush would run on a single charge or battery swap. We also checked out what type of brush heads the toothbrushes came with, what sorts of replacements were available and how easy they were to swap.

    For the brushes that used companion apps and were connected via Bluetooth, we checked out how easy it was to connect, set up an account and start using the app.

    We also looked at design, assessing whether the brushes included cases or brush-head covers for storage and travel and well-designed bases for use in a bathroom, and checked out handling in general.

    Performance

    We looked for brushes that offered an automated two-minute timer, the most useful feature according to the dental professionals we talked to. We also looked for 30-second quadrant timers, which keep you moving the brush to cover the entire mouth.

    Beyond that, we checked out if and how well a pressure sensor indicator (letting you know if you are brushing too hard or soft) was implemented, and tried out all of the brushing modes and intensity levels where those were an option.

    We also assessed app accuracy for the connected smart toothbrushes, checking to see if the recordings of our brushing sessions matched our notes.

    And importantly, we paid attention to what the brushes felt like to use and how clean they left our mouths feeling.

    Maintenance

    We looked at how often brush heads should be swapped and how easy it was to clean each brush. We also looked at the cost of replacement brush heads, and whether they were compatible with generic brush heads for less, as well as the availability of subscription options.

    We also noted whether a satisfaction guarantee or warranty was supplied, and whether the brushes we examined had received the ADA Seal of Acceptance.

    The Oral-B Pro 1000 costs about the same as our top pick, the Philips Sonicare 4100, and also comes from a well-respected brand, but offers fewer useful features at the same price. The toothbrush comes with an oscillating brush head, where we found the pressure to be too strong. Additionally, the toothbrush was incredibly loud and sounded like a freight train was in the bathroom.

    Like most other electric toothbrushes, there’s a two-minute timer (with 30-second indicators), but after the two minutes is up, the toothbrush will keep on going. This is great for those looking to brush for longer, but you’ll have to remember to switch it off when you’ve had enough.

    This toothbrush comes with a single cross-action brush head, but is compatible with many other Oral-B brush heads — such as ones that are geared towards flossing, sensitivity and precision. You can purchase a year’s worth of replacement brush heads at slightly over $5 per head, or there are also subscription options from Oral-B directly (although we found them significantly cheaper on Amazon). There are also many generic brush heads for this toothbrush, which can cost less, as low as $1 to $2 per head.

    At this price point, we wish it offered a more noticeable pressure sensor indicator (there’s no visible lamp, just tactile feedback) and multiple intensity levels. The pressure sensor functionality just stops the oscillation once you brush too hard — which you might not even notice — and doesn’t offer any indicators, such as a vibrating handle, beeping sound or light on the handle as we saw with many of the other toothbrushes. A full charge also only lasts for approximately 10 days, which is less than most of the other brushes tested.

    The Oral-B Genius 6000 offers many useful features — an oscillating brush head, pressure sensor and built-in timer — as well as five different modes, which will help you pick the best brushing type for your personal needs. But the corresponding app is one of the most cumbersome to use among the smart brushes we tested.

    The only way to get the full picture of your brushing is to hold the phone up directly in front of your face, while also brushing. This is incredibly difficult and simply didn’t work for us, at least not handheld. You’ll need to purchase a suction cup phone holder for your mirror, or have space for a stand. If not, you’ll lose the option of tracking your brushing coverage — which is the best part of the app. It’s also very loud, similar to the Oral-B Pro 1000 toothbrush.

    The Philips Sonicare 9900 Prestige — the company’s latest premium smart toothbrush — has only a single button onboard, with all of the other controls accessible only through the app. We found the app itself simple to use and helpful, with a clear layout for tracking your brushing progress and plenty of real-time feedback on how much pressure and motion you’re using (and should use). It accurately tracked our movements and gave us good feedback, but we felt that the brush made us rely on our phone more than the other smart brushes we tested.

    The Sonicare 9900 Prestige offers three intensity settings and five different cleaning modes, and has customizable vibration alerts that let you avoid scrubbing too hard or applying too much pressure. While the app will only track your progress if you leave it open while brushing, the brush itself saves your settings from session to session, so you don’t have to set everything up again each time.

    The design makes cleaning easy, and the brush comes with a slim leather travel case and USB-C travel cable, making it easy to take the toothbrush on the road. It comes with an all-purpose brush head, but it’s compatible with the many Philips Sonicare heads on the market.

    We loved using this toothbrush, but we’d only recommend it if you are very committed to smart features and plan to always — and we mean always — have your phone on you while brushing your teeth. But, if you are dedicated to oral hygiene and looking for the best feedback possible, then this app will give you just that.

    The Hum by Colgate offers one of the sleekest designs with its slim handle and small base. Aesthetically, it’s a nice touch next to the bathroom sink and there are multiple color options to complement your bathroom decor. It’s also incredibly light to hold, making brushing your teeth an easier feat.

    The brush offers three different levels of intensity and has a companion app to track the frequency, duration and accuracy of your brushing. We found, however, that while frequency and duration tracking were spot-on, it occasionally didn’t correctly identify which section of our mouth was being brushed. We did appreciate some of the app’s other features, such as the ability to use sensors on the brush to give us real-time reminders on our technique, noticing when we strayed away from holding the toothbrush at a 45-degree angle.

    We didn’t like the brush head’s shape and size as much as the Philips Sonicare heads, but appreciated the included tongue brush on the back of the brush head. While a toothbrush’s brush head can also clean your tongue, we preferred the dedicated brush, which got into the spaces on my tongue more easily and left me feeling like it had done a better job cleaning.

    We tested the rechargeable version of this toothbrush, but there’s also a cheaper battery-operated version available. The design is identical and functionality is similar save for offering only two intensity levels instead of three.

    The Philips Sonicare 6100 is a step up from the Philips Sonicare 4100, with a very similar look and feel. However, the main difference is that the 6100 version offers three intensity levels and three different modes — the default clean mode, along with whitening and gum care, which offer different brush head motions and automatically set the timer accordingly. To get the best results from these modes, Philips suggests purchasing brush heads designed specifically to take advantage of them.

    Similar to the 4100 version, the Philips Sonicare 6100 also offers a two-minute timer with 30-second pulser (with pausing capability), a pressure sensor indicator, brush head replacement reminder, 14-day battery life and two-year warranty.

    The Philips Sonicare also comes with a travel case, which is on the larger side, but it can fit the toothbrush and two brush heads.

    Although this toothbrush offers slightly more features than the 4100 version, for more than double the cost, we didn’t think this toothbrush offers enough enhancements to make it worth it. However, if you are specifically looking for a toothbrush that specializes in whitening your teeth or taking care of your gums, then this toothbrush has those options.

    The subscription Quip Electric Toothbrush looks very similar to a manual toothbrush, but based on our testing, is only a slight step up. While it vibrates, it’s less intense than any other brush we tested and we felt there wasn’t enough pressure, leaving us to brush our teeth with a traditional scrubbing motion. If you prefer a more gentle pressure, this might work for you, but we believe the majority of users will be disappointed, especially since there’s only one intensity setting.

    The Quip doesn’t have multiple modes, adjustable intensity or any of the extra features that fancier brushes have. However, unlike your everyday toothbrush, there’s a built-in two-minute timer and 30-second indicators to help ensure you’re brushing your teeth for the appropriate amount of time.

    We tested the “smart” version of the Quip (there are cheaper options that don’t have any smarts), which uses an app to tracks information such as brushing duration, coverage, strokes and intensity, alerting you if you are brushing too hard or too fast. Although limiting, for the information gathered, we found it to be incredibly accurate. You can also earn Quip points for brushing your teeth, which you can redeem for rewards like discounts on refills.

    Unlike most of the other toothbrushes we tested, the Quip runs on a single AAA battery rather than a rechargeable battery pack. This comes in handy if you’re traveling or just limited on electrical outlets, especially since the battery lasts for approximately 90 days.

    A $5 quarterly subscription gets you a replacement brush head and AAA battery every three months. You can also get the brush head and battery for the same price a la carte, but the subscription gives you a lifetime warranty on the toothbrush (otherwise you get only a year) so it’s a somewhat better deal. You can cancel your subscription or skip a delivery at any time.

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • The best first aid kits in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    The best first aid kits in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    Every home needs a dedicated first aid kit, even if just to organize the supplies scattered around in medicine cabinets, drawers and cupboards and make it much easier to grab them in a stressful situation. Whether you’re dealing with a fire, a weather emergency or just a skinned knee, an organized, complete kit can let you treat minor injuries quickly and effectively.

    To find the best first aid kits to keep in your home, car or with you while traveling, we tested 13 popular kits, ranging from pocket-size containers to backpacks full of gear, and consulted with experts at the Red Cross to best understand how to choose the right first aid kit for any situation.

    Best first aid kit overall

    An easy-to-use ring-binder-style design, high-quality products and all the essentials recommended by the Red Cross means you’ll be sure to have everything you need and be able to find it when you need it.

    Best budget first aid kit

    Don’t let the rock-bottom price of this kit fool you — it provides a useful collection of name-brand items packed securely in an easy-to-transport case.

    Best first aid kit for camping, backpacking and outdoor adventures

    In addition to basic supplies for household use, this AMK kit is lightweight, it prioritizes organization and it includes several items specifically for treating common hiking, backpacking and camping issues.

    With a heavy-duty case and a variety of high-quality items inside, this kit was a no-brainer as our top pick overall. Right out of the box we noticed how rugged and well made the case itself felt, complemented by metal grommets and sturdy zipper pulls. A wide handle also made it convenient for carrying around the house during our testing. We’re also big fans of the bright red color, which makes it easy to spot in a cluttered car trunk or backpack.

    What really sets this kit apart from the other models we tested was its ring-binder-style design. Once unzipped, the contents are displayed in clear vinyl pockets that you simply flip through to find the item you want. This design also allows it to lay flat like a book while you use it, and the extra-large sleeve pouches at the front and back of the kit are large enough to store other emergency documents, such as allergy issues or specific medical issues of a family member. When it comes to clear organization and finding first aid items quickly and easily in an emergency, it really doesn’t get much easier than this.

    Its focus on providing clear and concise first aid instructions and information was the other factor that separated this kit from the rest of the pack. In addition to a manual that includes straightforward instructions on dealing with common medical emergencies like choking, stroke, seizures and cardiac issues, the kit also includes several extra-large info sheets. These sheets are presented in large clear pockets on the left-hand side, with their corresponding first aid items on the right-hand side as you flip through.

    This kit was also only one of three other kits we tested that provided all of the essential items recommended by our Red Cross expert, Jeffrey L. Pellegrino. It also included two pairs of non-latex exam gloves, which, as the Red Cross explains, will allow you to change gloves if needed, or allow a second responder to help out at the same time. We were also impressed with the overall quality of the 115 pieces inside. The 1-inch-by-10-yard tape roll was a particular standout, and along with the bandages and dressings, held up really well during hands-on testing. Although the scissors were relatively small compared to the EMT-style shears found in other kits, they had no trouble cutting through the tape or trimming gauze.

    The durability, usability and variety provided by this kit make it just as useful in your cupboard as a go-to home first aid kit as it would in the trunk of your car or backpack on a camping trip.

    The Band-Aid Johnson and Johnson 140-piece first aid kit, with all contents laid out on a white tabletop

    While this kit doesn’t have the quantity or variety of most other options, its rock-bottom price makes it a great choice for those on a budget. We’re honestly not even sure exactly how this kit can be priced this low, considering the bandages alone are worth almost 75% of the cost of the entire kit, and it still provides eight other products! A durable plastic case ensures that everything stays safely inside, and the oversized handle makes it convenient to carry around from place to place.

    Even though there aren’t any spacers or really any organizational elements to this kit (it’s essentially a big lunch box), it was actually easier to find what we wanted than many other kits. Since nearly every item is included in its own separate box, there aren’t a hundred small pieces floating around needing to be organized into sleeves or pouches. When you’re finished with the bandages, or Neosporin, or gauze, you simply put the rest back in its box and toss it back in the kit.

    All of the bandages performed really well in our testing, especially the “Water Block” Band-Aids that stayed put even after washing the dishes. The included Red Cross manual is a great resource and covers a wide range of emergency situations as well as the necessary steps to treat them effectively.

    We’d like to be clear that this kit does not include all the essentials recommended by the Red Cross, such as gloves, a tape roll or a CPR face shield. It also lacks a pair of scissors and tweezers, so you’ll probably want to add those separately. That being said, the pieces that this kit does include are well thought out and all high-quality name-brand products, making this a really practical kit to have on hand for common first aid situations.

    The Adventure Medical Kits Mountain Series Backpacker first aid kit, with all contents laid out on a white tabletop

    What makes this kit so great is that even though it’s designed to be convenient and functional for backpacking and hiking, it’s also versatile enough to be used in your home or stashed in your car for emergencies. Except for a CPR face mask, it provides everything recommended by our Red Cross expert, along with an impressive variety of bandages, including knuckle and butterfly options.

    Our favorite aspect of this kit is its unique design, which unzips to reveal four distinct storage pouches, each labeled with the general purpose of the contents inside. This organizational layout could come in extremely handy when out on a trail or campsite, where you don’t have a convenient surface to unload your kit and find what you need. The semitransparent material helps even more, giving you an idea of what’s inside each pouch before you even unzip it. A fabric handle on top even allows you to hang it from a branch while you work, making things even easier.

    What makes this kit specifically useful for outdoor adventurers, in addition to the well-organized design, are the items most useful for those who may not have immediate access to a pharmacy or health care facilities. Things like insect bite wipes, Diamode tablets for treating diarrhea, moleskin for blisters and a large plastic syringe for irrigating wounds are not always found in all first aid kits. A pair of heavy-duty EMT-style shears — as opposed to cheaper, flimsy scissors — could also come in handy for cutting moleskin, or clothes to help make a tourniquet or splint.

    Another great feature of this kit that was also included in the other two AMK kits we tested is the first aid manual. This “Guide to Wilderness Medicine” was by far the most comprehensive and helpful manual we found in our testing, and with so much information, it would be invaluable if you found yourself in an emergency situation while away from roads or the ability to call for help.

    You need a first aid kit because they keep all your medical supplies together in one place, so if an emergency does occur, you’ll be able to act quickly. If you or a family member needs first aid, you aren’t going to feel like hunting around your house looking for bandages in the bathroom drawer, your desk for a pair of scissors, the medicine cabinet for antibiotic ointment, etc. A first aid kit is also portable, so if someone crashes their bike in the driveway or suffers a campfire burn in the backyard, you can simply grab the kit and be confident that you have everything you need.

    If you’re out of your house on a hike, camping trip, soccer practice or scout outing, a first aid kit is even more important. Even relatively minor injuries can become serious issues if you have to wait until you reach a hospital or civilization to get treatment. This will also prevent you from having to improvise with unsanitary or inappropriate items that aren’t meant for treatment. A sterile bandage is going to be a lot more effective in the long run than a dirty handkerchief or sweaty T-shirt.

    A first aid kit is also an important piece of an effective emergency or disaster kit, which is a larger, more comprehensive kit meant to prepare you for a weather or natural disaster. In this case, you may not have access to a hospital or ambulance for some time, making an effective first aid kit even more important to have on hand.

    Group of bagged first aid kits laid out on a white tabletop

    Alex Rennie/CNN Underscored

    A first aid kit should contain everything you need to treat a variety of common first aid ailments and injuries. Unfortunately, there are a ton of first aid kits on the market, and all of them seem to have a different idea of what exactly should go inside. To help simplify things, we consulted with Jeffrey L. Pellegrino, Ph.D., MPH, senior advisor to the American Red Cross Scientific Advisory Council and professor of emergency management and homeland security at the University of Akron, to tell us the five essential items that you should make sure are in your first aid kit:

    • First aid guidebook
    • Non-latex gloves
    • Assorted self-adhesive bandages, gauze, roller bandages and adhesive tape
    • Triple antibiotic ointment
    • A breathing barrier to prevent transmission of disease while performing rescue breaths.

    It’s worth noting that just because a first aid kit doesn’t include all these items doesn’t mean you should automatically write it off as inferior. If it’s missing one or two components, feel free to purchase them separately. Pellegrino made sure to add that for a kit specifically for children “include any lifesaving medications (epinephrine, inhalers, etc.) that a child might need.”

    Pellegrino recommends asking yourself the following questions to help determine the best kit for you:

    • How many people does the kit need to serve? (A kit for seven people on a kayaking trip needs to be larger than one for a few family members at home.)
    • What are the types of injuries you can expect? (You’ll want to be prepared for more serious injuries on a camping or backpacking trip than a day at the amusement park.)
    • What else do you have to work with? (If you have other supplies to work and improvise with, you can keep the size and weight of your first aid kit down.)
    • Where will it be stored? (Pellegrino explains that first aid kits and their contents are susceptible to the environment, “so where and how you store it is important to it being useful.”)

    Most first aid kits appear to be fairly similar, which makes it tough to confidently choose the best one. Although we’re not licensed first responders, we did our best to evaluate and compare each kit by using criteria based on our research and interviews with experts in the field as well as hands-on testing of each kit’s components. We used these results to select our top choices, and to understand the pros and cons of the rest of our testing pool.

    We interviewed and consulted with several experts in the first aid field, including Pellegrino. Pellegrino helped inform us as to the essential items that should be included in a first aid kit as well as other factors to keep in mind when choosing one. We cross-checked each of our kits with his recommendations, noting which items were missing or of poor quality. It’s worth noting that you can purchase items separately to supplement your kit, so missing an essential item or two isn’t an automatic deal breaker.

    Proper ease of use is essential when it comes to first aid kits, allowing you to use it effectively and efficiently. We evaluated how convenient and straightforward each first aid kit was to use, noting how easy they were to open, find what you want, repack when finished and close back up.

    Being able to find items quickly is essential in an emergency, so it’s important that your kit is well organized. The easier it is to repack everything when you’re finished will also save you hassle and headache when it’s time to use the kit next time. After opening each kit, we went through its compartments, pockets, sleeves and other organizational elements, taking note of how easy it was to locate individual items and how thought out the overall design layout was.

    A first aid kit should be durable enough to withstand a moderate amount of wear and tear without ripping, cracking or coming apart. While using each kit, we paid close attention to their overall sturdiness and durability when it came to straps, clasps, zippers and closures.

    We opened up each kit and did as much hands-on testing as possible with their contents, assessing the quality of the included items. This included applying bandages and tape to our hands and arms and noting how well their adhesive performed, testing any single-use thermometers, tearing open antiseptic wipes to make sure they weren’t dried out and pulling on any examination gloves or masks. We paid close attention to the build quality and material of any tools or instruments, such as tweezers and scissors, which had a broader range in quality than we expected. While some kits provided high-quality EMT shears and metal tweezers, others used cheap, flimsy scissors and plastic tweezers.

    Doom & Bloom Ultimate Compact Grab N’ Go First Aid Kit

    $129 $99 at Doom & Bloom

    If you’re looking for a kit that’s more focused on treating serious, traumatic injuries, this is probably the option for you. It includes several emergency items that weren’t found in any other kit, including a heavy-duty elastic tourniquet, an Israeli compression bandage and blood-clotting granules. What I really liked about this kit is that, in addition to a basic first aid and CPR manual, it also includes a large instructional sheet that walks you through the steps to treat and control severe bleeding injuries. This sheet uses large images and short, straightforward instructions, which is exactly what you want when your adrenaline is pumping and you don’t have time to carefully flip through an entire book. Even the tourniquet has easy-to-follow instructions printed directly on it, clearly indicating how tight to apply it. The quality of all the items in this pack were all legitimate, name-brand products too, unlike some obscure or knockoff items I’ve seen in lower-quality kits. The high price, relatively small amount of light-duty bandages and lack of a CPR face mask ultimately kept this kit out of our top spot, but if those aren’t a deal breaker for you, this is a fantastic kit.

    The relatively bulky size of this kit isn’t the most convenient for those with limited space or those who plan on stashing their kit in their backpack or glove box, but its variety of essential items makes it a good basic option to have on hand at home or a job site. The most valuable feature of this kit is the fact that it includes all of the items recommended by the Red Cross, which was only the case in two other kits we tested. It also includes a nice supply of bandage types and sizes as well as extra-large sterile trauma pads and conforming gauze rolls, essential for minimizing blood loss during serious emergencies. A pair of triangular bandages and safety pins are also convenient for putting together a makeshift sling. Two pairs of gloves was a nice perk as well, as most kits provide only a single set. We were surprised to see that the only medication provided in this kit was a single aspirin packet, whereas almost every other kit provided at least an additional supply of ibuprofen or acetaminophen. The case itself didn’t feel especially durable, though, and I nearly snapped off a hinge clip the first time I tried to open it.

    Even though this kit is essentially just a large, heavy-duty Ziploc bag, I still found it convenient to use (plus, this makes the entire kit completely waterproof). It hits the sweet spot of just enough items to be useful, but not so much that it’s hard to find what you want. A smaller, resealable bag inside helps to store the smaller items, and even if you need to dump out of the contents to locate a specific item, it’s not a big deal to just toss everything back in. It offers a good selection of useful items like burn gels, anti-diarrhea tablets (very valuable if needed on a hike or camping), electrolyte tablets and sting relief pads. We would have liked a little variety in the bandage selection, though, like butterfly or knuckle options. We also appreciated the inclusion of a small sheet of moleskin, but since it’s not precut and there are no scissors included in the kit, you’re going to have a tough time applying it. We also wish the plastic tweezers were metal, although this may have something to do with preventing accidentally puncturing the storage bag itself. Although this kit doesn’t include a first aid manual, it does provide a CPR face shield with detailed CPR instruction printed on it, which is a big plus.

    The compact sibling of the AMK Mountain Backpacker Medical Kit, this AMK kit is just as easy to use and has almost as much convenient, hiker-friendly functionality. Once unzipped, it folds open to reveal three separate organization pouches, each labeled with the basic use of the items inside: “Wound Care/Burn/Blister,” “Medication,” “Cuts & Scrapes” and “Stop Bleeding Fast,” which contains a large trauma pad and rubber gloves. To make things even easier, the specific contents of each of these pouches are printed on the back of the kit, so you can locate what you want before you even unzip it. The comprehensive “Guide to Wilderness Medicine” is a great resource to have on hand while out adventuring, and covers helpful first aid situations like fishhook removal, diabetic emergencies, lightning injuries and altitude illness. In addition to a nice variety of quality bandages, precut moleskin patches and gauze pads, this kit features a really nice pair of EMT-style shears and compact metal tweezers. It does lack a CPR face shield, though, so keep that in mind.

    This compact kit is small enough to fit practically anywhere — it’s about the size of an Altoids tin — and with just 27 items inside, it’s easy to dump out and pick out what you want without much hassle. Despite the limited number of pieces, it still provides an impressive variety of bandages, such as butterfly, knuckle and spot options, as well as antibiotic ointment. I also appreciated the included razor blade, which in the absence of a pair of scissors could be useful for carefully cutting through clothing or stripping cloth to make a tourniquet. Considering the extremely low price, there’s no reason not to grab a couple of these to toss into your tackle box, glove box or backpack, but you’ll still need to purchase a full-size kit if you want to be prepared for a wide range of first aid situations.

    If you’re planning on traveling abroad and want to bring along a first aid kit, this AMK option would be a great choice. My absolute favorite part of this kit is its visual indicator diagrams, which allow you to quickly and accurately explain the details of a first aid situation to others, even if you don’t speak the same language. With the addition of its handy pencil and paper, these visual aids can help you transcend any language barriers. I’ve personally struggled to explain the state of an injured hiker up the trail to a native speaker, and tools like these would have made the situation much easier. The kit itself is also convenient to use, and the transparent sleeves make it easy to find what you’re looking for. It includes a great first aid manual — just like the other AMK kits — and the contents included a nice mix of bandage sizes and styles as well as moleskin for blister treatment. It doesn’t include a CPR breathing barrier, and it curiously lacked a pair of scissors, although that does make it more convenient for air travel.

    Looking for a first aid kit that’s a little more functional? This VSSL kit is stored in a metal tube that doubles as an extremely bright LED flashlight on one end and a compass on the other. A rolled-up sleeve inside contains the first aid items, and when unrolled, it showcases everything in transparent mesh pockets. Unfortunately, unscrewing the end caps and pulling out the sleeve isn’t the most convenient, and it takes some time to accomplish. It’s a tight fit inside the tube too, so reinserting takes a little finesse. That being said, the supplies themselves were of good quality, especially the 3M brand Steri-Strips, which we’ve found to be extremely useful for closing longer cuts that bandages struggle with. This kit didn’t include a pair of scissors, but the compact metal tweezers were nice quality and should hold up well. The disposable thermometers were a nice perk, although I did find them to be 2 degrees lower than my actual temperature when compared to the result from my home thermometer. The 45-piece total is relatively low compared to the other options on our list, so it won’t be practical to cover the needs of more than a couple people. It is completely waterproof, though, which could be a valuable selling point for a kayaker or river rafter.

    This kit probably isn’t for the inexperienced, but if you have the proper training and are confident using professional medical instruments, it could be a good fit. By including advanced medical supplies like a stethoscope, a blood pressure cuff and a range of oral airway sizes, the items in this kit can be used to monitor and treat serious first aid events, as long as you know how to use them. If you’re not specifically trained in these instruments, you could end up doing more harm than good if you attempt to use them during an emergency. The relatively brief first aid manual makes it even more important that a trained responder use this kit. We were most impressed with the sturdiness and organization-friendly design of the backpack itself, which features a mind-boggling amount of compartments, pockets, pouches, sleeves and elastic straps. Many of these are located on the exterior of the bag too, allowing you to store your most used or time-sensitive items within easy reach. The high quantity of items included, in addition to the professional instruments and useful tools like EMT shears, forceps and a penlight for concussion diagnosis, make this kit a practical choice to have on hand at an event like a sports camp or scout trip.

    If you’re interested in a high-end kit that’s designed with durability and variety in mind, this could be exactly what you’re looking for, though it comes at a price. Right out of the box, I could tell that the bag itself was extremely durable, and the clips, Velcro and zippers felt sturdy and secure as well. You can really throw this thing around without worrying too much about damaging it. Inside, the kit opens up into two large compartments, each with their own collection of pockets, sleeves and elastic bands, containing a huge amount of gear. In addition to a great variety and quantity of bandages, gauze pads and tape, it also includes a pair of EMT-style shears — the best quality of all the options I tested — a battery-powered thermometer and a penlight with a handy chart printed on the side for comparing dilated pupils. Items like a finger splint, burn creams and a large Burnshield trauma dressing make this kit especially well suited for camping excursions. All this gear is packed in separate baggies for specific injuries and treatments, making it relatively easy to keep things organized. That being said, some items are hidden in hard-to-find compartments, and if what you’re looking for isn’t in plain view, you may need to take most of the kit apart until you find it. It was also a challenge to repack as well, especially if you forget where everything needs to go.

    This zippered kit is simple to open and use, and it contains a surprisingly large quantity of items, most notably the 187 individual adhesive bandages in a range of sizes. The clear plastic pockets made it easy to see a lot of items at once, although anything stored in the rear sleeves will need a little more digging to access. Considering the low price, you’re definitely getting a pretty good bang for your buck with this kit and its nearly 300 total items. In addition to the basics, it also includes several useful items not always found in kits in this price range, such as sting relief pads, tongue depressors that can be used as finger splints and disposable thermometers. We do wish the 1/2-inch tape rolls were a little wider, but they still provided a decent amount of security during my testing. The small pair of scissors felty pretty cheap and flimsy as well, but in their defense, they did cut through the moleskin sheets and tape during my testing fairly easily. This kit include all the Red Cross essentials except for the CPR breathing barrier, so you’ll need to purchase one separately if that’s a priority.

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • The best emergency radios in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    The best emergency radios in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    Because severe weather situations can develop extremely quickly, it’s imperative you give yourself as much time as possible to prepare. Emergency radios are designed to give you a head start, providing access to NOAA weather frequencies that can alert you to upcoming or current weather situations like flash floods, hurricanes, blizzards, tornadoes and more. And to make sure you can keep using them as an emergency is happening, many are also designed with hand cranks and solar panels so you can extend their running time practically indefinitely even without access to power. With battery-charging capability and AM/FM bands, they’re also a useful addition to camping or hiking gear.

    We put nine of the most popular emergency radios to the test, comparing their ability to issue alerts and receive emergency weather broadcasts, and assessing how functional and useful they would be in an actual emergency situation.

    The best emergency radio overall

    With easy-to-use alerts, four charging options, a bright LCD screen, a powerful flashlight and straightforward controls, the Midland ER310 outperformed the other radios we tested in every area and makes a valuable addition to your household emergency kit.

    The best emergency radio overall: Midland ER310

    If you’re looking for an emergency radio that’s extremely easy to use while providing a variety of useful bells and whistles, look no further than the Midland ER310, a solidly built weather alert radio that performed well on all of our tests and was simple to use — which means it’ll be there if you need it and you’ll have no problem operating it when you do.

    The ER310 is well-built, with a sturdy, high-quality feel, and the textured body makes it comfortable to pick up and maintain a good grip on while carrying around. Thanks to a large, bright, backlit LCD screen I was able to maneuver through the different bands and frequencies without any trouble, and the clear, helpful instruction manual provided any extra assistance I needed. The ER310 is a weather alert radio, not just a weather band radio, which means it is able to receive emergency-band alerts automatically without you having to tune in first — a useful feature during hurricane season.

    An emergency checklist was included in the box as well, which was a nice perk and valuable for anyone buying this radio as part of a larger household emergency kit.

    The Midland ER310 performed well in testing, providing an impressive 26 minutes of radio time after just 60 seconds of hand cranking. The large handle of the crank was also the most comfortable of all the radios in our group, which can make a big difference if you end up needing it in an extended emergency situation. Its solar panel was also able to charge the radio enough after an hour in direct sunlight to provide full functionality, and filled the battery to 1/3 after six hours. Your results may vary on these measures depending on the speed you turn the crank or cloudiness of the sky, but under the conditions in which we tested, and in relation to the rest of the radios tested, these results put the ER310 at the top of the group.

    Setting up the ER301 to receive alerts and receiving the NOAA weather alert test to confirm couldn’t have been easier, thanks to a dedicated “Alert” button that enables the function. Other radios we tested used a multipurpose button that enabled alerts and functioned as a “menu” button. Even though that’s not a dealbreaker, we appreciated that the ER310 gave us one less step to remember, an additional point in its favor in a stressful situation.

    I was also impressed with the brightness of the integrated flashlight, which provided three settings to choose from: standard, bright and flashing. Lower light settings help to conserve battery life, and come in handy if you need to read a map and not just illuminate a hallway. The placement of the button and raised grip also gave an ergonomic, flashlight-like feel to the whole unit, making it easy to direct the beam where I needed it.

    Its rechargeable 2,600 mAh battery was the second-largest in our testing group, and combined with the three other power options (solar, hand crank or six AAA batteries) makes the Midland ER310 a reliable choice for anyone who wants to be prepared for power outages and have the ability to charge their mobile devices.

    What’s the difference between an emergency radio and regular radio?

    Emergency radios are designed to provide accurate and up-to-date weather information and alerts using the NOAA (National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration) network of radio stations, while your typical transistor radio will only receive AM/FM stations. Granted, in an emergency like a hurricane or flood situation, your AM/FM stations may provide weather info, but they’re not going to provide the around-the-clock updates that you get from a dedicated NOAA station. Emergency radios can also offer additional features that can be valuable in an emergency, like hand cranks and solar panel chargers when batteries run low, and USB ports to charge your phone.

    If you think you could be in an emergency weather situation, you should probably get an emergency radio. Power grids can go out, cell towers can go down, phone batteries can die, and in fast-moving weather events, up-to-date information can give you time to get to safety.

    Those who live in areas frequented by dangerous weather events like flash floods, tornadoes, and hurricanes should absolutely have an emergency radio. Plus, according to the National Weather Service, NOAA broadcasts can include non-weather emergencies and natural disasters when appropriate, making them even more useful.

    The extra bells and whistles of an emergency radio may seem gimmicky at first, but considering the uncertain and unpredictable nature of weather and natural emergencies, they can be extremely useful when the time comes. To choose the best option for you, take some time to think about the types of weather emergencies that are common to your area, and the features that would be most helpful to you.

    You should also make sure you’re aware of whether or not you’re buying a weather band radio or a weather alert radio. We suggest a weather alert radio, like the Midland ER310 — these will automatically alert you of weather emergencies whether the radio is turned on and tuned in or not, while weather band radios must be turned on and tuned into the emergency band to receive the alert. Weather band radios have their uses if you’re expecting poor weather, but weather alert radios are more generally useful since situations can change quickly.

    If you want to give yourself as many options as possible when it comes to power, go with a radio that has at least three charging methods. Whether those are solar panels, hand cranks, a rechargeable battery or replaceable alkaline batteries, they all add up to being more prepared for emergencies that could last more than a day or two.

    USB charging capability is another useful feature. Having your radio double as a power bank for your phone can be even more valuable than receiving NOAA transmissions, and can allow you to call for help when necessary. Combined with a manual crank or solar panel, these two features can keep your phone functioning even during power outages.

    The type of light source is another factor to consider. While flashlight-style beams are great for searching around the house when the power goes out, they’re not as useful for tasks like reading or eating in the dark. These activities would benefit from a lantern-style light that can cast a broader beam and doesn’t require anyone to hold it in place.

    A group of seven emergency radios on a grassy lawn, charging in the sun via solar panels.

    Since many of the radios we tested had similar features, and it can be overwhelming to try and choose one without seeing them in person, we ran each one through a comprehensive testing and evaluation process. This allowed us to confidently select our top pick, and will hopefully provide the information you need to choose the best option for you.

    Perhaps most importantly, an emergency radio should be easy to use, since you won’t want to waste precious time searching and pressing buttons or fumbling through an instruction manual during an emergency. We paid close attention to the layout and function of the buttons or dials, and made note of any steps or controls that were confusing or required any trial and error to use correctly.

    To assess performance, we tuned each radio into our local NOAA weather broadcast, comparing both how simple the tuning process was and the clarity of the transmission from our basement. For the radios that were designed to automatically alert you when a weather alert is issued, we activated the “alert” setting, and waited until the NOAA’s weekly alert test, which occurs every Wednesday. We compared how effectively each radio received the alert, as well as how having the “alert” setting activated affected the rest of the radio’s functions. (The Kaito KA340 Weather Alert Radio for example, required you to turn this alert setting off if you wanted to use any other radio function, which seems impractical.)

    After draining the batteries overnight, we evaluated the effectiveness of each radio’s various charging methods. To look at hand-crank charging, we cranked continuously for one minute, then left the radio running on the NOAA weather station and timed how long it took to run out of juice. We noted how ergonomic the crank handles felt, how comfortable they were to use and the effort required to turn them. For radios with solar panels, we again drained their batteries overnight and then placed them in direct sunlight in our backyard. We checked in after an hour to see how much, or if any, battery power was generated, and again six hours later.

    While setting up and testing each radio, we kept a close eye on their overall build quality. We noted whether they felt cheap and flimsy or sturdy and well-built. We also made sure to use all the dials, sliders, knobs and buttons to see if any were loose and rattled around, or if they had a solid, secure feel.

    We explored each radio’s light features, especially those that had multiple settings like SOS beacons or lantern-style LEDS that could be more useful than just a simple flashlight-style beam. We compared their brightness as well, and how simple or confusing they were to turn on and off.

    The storage capacity of the battery, measured in mAh, indicates how much power your radio will be able to hold and how effective it will be when charging a cell phone (current flagship phones have batteries rated in the 3,000-4,000 mAh range). We checked each radios specs to find out their specific mAh, and was surprised to find such a wide range (850 to 4,000 mAh) within our testing group; we preferred radios with more capacity.

    We compared each radio’s power source options, battery capacity, any USB charging abilities and whether or not they had a backlit display. This gave us a better idea of each radio’s overall functionality and the value it could provide in an emergency.

    FosPower Emergency Solar Hand Crank Portable Radio

    A low-cost alternative, the FosPower Emergency Solar Hand Crank Portable Radio still provides a good amount of useful features and four charging options. Its manual tuner knobs were simple to use, and I had no issues quickly finding the NOAA station I was looking for. This is a weather band radio rather than a weather alert model, so it won’t automatically receive NOAA alerts; you’ll have to tune in first when you expect to face threatening weather conditions. This radio lacks the digital tuning and push-button controls of higher-end options, but that’s not necessarily a bad thing — the simple design, without menus or digital control, means there’s little to go wrong, and there’s no need to remember what buttons perform which functions if you’re under stress. And older users may appreciate these manual tuner controls over digital. This radio also provided an impressive 32 minutes of listening time after one minute of hand cranking, but struggled in my solar testing (zero function after one hour). The low price of this radio could be appealing to those looking for a budget-friendly option, but if that’s your priority, we’d recommend shelling out the extra $5 and choosing the similar RunningSnail MD-090P and its 4,000 mAh battery.

    Although the Kaito KA340 Weather Alert Radio had some interesting features, like Bluetooth connectivity and a microSD memory card slot, the confusing layout of the controls makes it difficult to recommend for emergency use. The physical controls — a collection of sliders, knobs and buttons — had a flimsy, loose feel to them, which made it hard to achieve precise volume or radio settings. I was most confused by the lack of visual arrow or indicator on the band selection slider, which made it tough to tell which setting you were selecting. This was made even more challenging by the large range of options (seven!) to choose from. I did appreciate its variety of power options — rechargeable lithium-ion battery, four AA batteries, hand crank and solar panel — and the hand crank in particular provided 26 minutes of radio time after just 60 seconds of cranking. The flashlight threw a nice wide beam, and the large lantern light was a nice perk as well. Although it felt less durable and rugged than the other radios I tested, this could be a useful choice for those interested in taking advantage of the plethora of media inputs. Although this radio is able to receive NOAA alerts, you won’t be able to use any other function while the “alert” setting is selected.

    Midland ER210

    This Midland model is essentially just a scaled-down version of our top pick, the Midland ER310, providing nearly all the bells and whistles in a smaller package. It only lacks the dog whistle and the ability to use disposable batteries, but still provides the same hand crank and solar charging ability, as well as the multi-beam flashlight. I really enjoyed the smaller size of this radio, especially when it came to using the hand crank, although I wish the crank handle had a bit more material to hold onto. Sixty seconds of cranking provided an impressive 32 minutes of listening time, which was one of the longest of the radios I tested. The NOAA weather alert was simple to set up, the straightforward controls made switching between bands easy and I especially liked how the display would flash back to the current time every 10 seconds or so. The backlit LED screen was easy to read in the dark, too. This radio also has a convenient carrying handle like the Midland ER310, which made it comfortable to carry around.

    Midland ER10VP

    If you’re looking for an effective, high-quality radio that won’t take up much room in a drawer or backpack, this 5 by 3 by 1.5-inch Midland model could be just what you’re looking for. The younger sibling of the Midland ER310 and Midland ER210, this radio fits in the palm of your hand and weighs just 8.8 ounces, by far the lightest I tested. Despite the small size, this little radio still provides automatic NOAA alerts without your having to tune in first, a feature that several much larger and more expensive radios did not. You also get a flashlight with three settings, a headphone jack and a handy wrist lanyard so you can attach it to your pack or hang from a tree limb at your campsite. Its controls were extremely easy to use, and setting up the NOAA alert was simple to do as well. The only drawback to this little radio is that it only runs on three AA batteries, so no rechargeable battery, hand crank or solar panels. That being said, Midland claims that its battery will last for up to 26 days when in alert standby mode, which should be sufficient for most emergency situations.

    Midland WR120B/WR120EZ Emergency Weather Alert Radio

    What this Midland radio lacks in portability and power source options, it makes up for in customization. Unlike our other radios that only pick up NOAA weather bands and alerts, this model can be used with S.A.M.E. (Specific Area Message Encoding) programming. This allows you to input your current location and only receive alerts for that area. This radio also allows you to pick and choose the alerts you want to receive, and disable any that you don’t want to be bothered with. These settings may seem complicated, but we were pleasantly surprised at how easy it was to program and configure the specific alerts you want, thanks to the helpful instruction manual. Our favorite feature of this radio was probably the extra-large “Weather” button on the front of the unit, which allows you to get the current weather report at the push of a button. No tuning or band selection needed. Its trilingual settings (English, Spanish and French) also make it useful for potential users who may not use English as their primary language. This radio, however, is really useful only for alerts in advance of an emergency since it does need to be plugged into a wall outlet to function — you’ll need an external power source of some kind to keep it working.

    The most impressive feature of this radio is its 4,000 mAh battery, which is substantially larger than any other model we tested, with the two closest competitors offering 2,600 mAh batteries. This means that the RunningSnail MD-090P should be able to run longer than any other, which also translates to more charging capacity when it comes to using it as a power bank to keep your devices working. This in itself is a hugely valuable benefit in an emergency situation when the power goes out. I also appreciated the powerful flashlight and separate “reading lamp,” which provides a wide, soft light source, perfect for reading a map or book or performing any emergency repair or maintenance tasks. Like the FosPower model we looked at, the RunningSnail is only a weather band radio, and doesn’t have automated weather alert functionality (though it can clearly receive NOAA weather stations). This lack of automatic alerts ultimately kept it out of our consideration for the top spot, but if that’s not a dealbreaker for you, the low price and large battery of this radio could make it a solid all-in-one emergency solution.

    I was a big fan of nearly every aspect of this weather alert radio, except for its 850 mAh battery capacity, the smallest in the testing group. This doesn’t make it a poor choice in itself, but if a long running time before having to recharge is a priority for you, you might want to consider another model. That being said, the controls were simple to use, and the orange backlit display made it easy to work with in low light conditions. It was also the only model I tested that offered radio presets, which could be convenient for those who plan on using its AM/FM radio frequently. I also appreciated the rubber end caps that cover all four corners of the unit, which provided a very durable and rugged feel and made me confident that it could survive a moderate drop or fall. This radio performed well in all performance tests too, providing 32 minutes of listening time after 60 seconds of hand cranking, and it reached half capacity after six hours in the sun.

    The Eton — an update to a well-regarded Red Cross-branded model — exhibited poor enough charging speeds in both the solar and hand crank tests that we wouldn’t recommend it at all. One minute of cranking provided zero power, and even after an additional five minutes, the battery was still dead. An hour in the sun had the same result in my solar test, although after six hours in direct sunlight it did register that two of the three battery bars were filled and the unit was functioning normally. This may well have been a quality control issue — a CNN Underscored editor owns and has used the precursor to this model, the FRX3, and has never encountered this issue — but should you order, you’ll want to make sure it works out of the box.

    It was fairly simple to set up and find the band and station you want, and the NOAA alert worked perfectly — but without the battery power, it won’t last you through a significant power outage. I do wish the flashlight were more powerful or, considering the unit’s height when stood upright, that it featured some kind of lantern-style illumination. The unique X-shaped design does make it easy to carry around, although the large shape may not be convenient if you plan on keeping it in a small drawer or emergency kit.

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • The best solar generators in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    The best solar generators in 2022 | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    A solar generator pairs a large-capacity rechargeable power station — a big battery, at heart — with a set of portable solar panels, making for a versatile device that can provide backup power for your home during an emergency and do double duty for off-grid activities like camping, tailgating or even DIY projects around your yard. They’re safer to store and use and far simpler to maintain than gas generators, and with people more and more conscious of the threat of storms and wildfires, they make a lot of sense for emergency preparedness.

    To choose the best solar generator, we tested 13 devices for an entire summer in the hot Florida sun to determine which device could reliably provide the most power with the least fuss. We considered factors such as portability, ease of setup, price, industrial design, technology and innovation when making our final selections.

    The best small-capacity solar generator

    Bluetti’s EB70S packs the latest LFP battery chemistry and plenty of capacity into a compact package that’s great for camping, on-the-go preparedness, a car emergency kit or taking any place you need reliable power.

    The best medium-capacity solar generator

    With updated features, an upgrade LiFePO4/LFP battery, a ton of ports and easy expansion, the new EcoFlow Delta 2 outperformed everything in its class in our testing. It hits the sweet spot for most people who need portable power and a dependable emergency backup.

    The best high-capacity solar powered generator:

    Easy to use, packed with the most up-to-date features and battery technology, and expandable enough to serve as a whole-house emergency generator, the EcoFlow Delta Pro beat impressive competitors in our testing, emerging as the best large solar generator.

    Key specs

    • Battery Capacity: 716 Wh
    • Battery Chemistry: LFP/LiFePO4
    • Expansion Capacity: No
    • Maximum AC Inverter Capacity: 800W
    • Maximum Solar DC Input Capacity: 200W
    • Panel to Generator Charge Interface: MC4 to 8mm DC
    • Output Ports: (4) 110V AC (2 grounded), (2) 5V/3A USB-A, (2) 100W USB PD, (2) regulated 12V/10 DC, (1) 12V car, 15W wireless charge pad
    • App Managed: No
    • Weight: 21.4 pounds
    • Charge Time: 4 hours
    •  Panel Tested: Jackery 200W
    • Warranty: 2 Years

    The Bluettti EB70S offers a high-capacity battery (716 watt-hours) and an inverter capable of handling up to 800 watts worth of devices in a compact, portable package perfect for everything from camping to keeping your critical devices going in a blackout. It is packed with output ports, and the two USB PD 100Ws and wireless charging pad make it ideal if you want to charge mobile devices quickly. It is capable of handling most of your small-device power needs, whether it’s a laptop, tablet, smartphone, LED lighting unit (it has a built-in lantern as well in case you read at night), BBQ controller, mini refrigerator or small fan.

    Functionality doesn’t need to mean ugly. The rectangular unit with rounded edges and an integrated folding carrying handle looks a bit like an old-school boombox and comes in four colors; our testing sample was a bright blueish-green. It’s small enough, along with a single panel, to keep in a car at all times.

    The EB70S isn’t just pretty. Under the hood is one of the least expensive solar generators on the market using the latest lithium iron phosphate (LiFePO4 or LFP) battery chemistry, which charges faster, runs cooler and lasts longer. In theory, this unit will last a very long time, an estimated 2,500+ full charge cycles, according to the manufacturer, meaning it should be there when you need it

    At 21.4 pounds, the Bluetti EB70S is light enough to move around easily. The power supply for AC charging is a separate unit, further lightening the load. The DC inverter port for the AC adapter input and the solar cable is an 8A barrel type, used by several manufacturers including Jackery, one of the most popular, so panels should be easy to find. For testing, as we didn’t have Bluetti’s 200W panel on hand, we used one of Jackery’s 200W SolarSaga units, which plugged right in without any intermediate adapter cables. It worked just fine, so MPPT (Maximum Power Point Tracking, the converter technology that manages solar panel to battery connections) compatibility on the unit is good.

    The user interface is straightforward. One small button activates the four AC outlets, another activates the USB and other DC ports. Another button activates a front-panel light. A small LED color display indicates input and output watts, along with battery capacity, which is displayed as a pictograph of a battery with five fill bars rather than a percentage. The battery management system on this unit is very simplistic, perhaps overly so — it doesn’t indicate depletion or charge completion times. Additionally, if the battery is full or at a high level of charge and it is not discharging, it won’t show any wattage input. It’s information that would be nice to have, but given the overall solid performance, missing it is by no means a dealbreaker.

    The unit was easily able to drive all of our variable test loads of 60W to 200W, and with a solar panel hooked up, our small 60W freezer never depleted the battery, even on days of mixed weather.

    With a full 200W load using dual 70W fans overnight, we could drain it in about three and a half hours, but this is a heavy continuous load for a small generator designed primarily for camping and short-term usage.

    With the speedy recharge rate, even at about 50% efficiency on the panel, we could go from day to night uninterrupted for two consecutive days running a 100-watt load without depleting the unit. The only time we ran into issues was after a day of rain with no sun at all.

    An EcoFlow Delta 2 solar generator with expansion battery, set up on a stone patio

    Key specs

    • Battery Capacity: 1,024 Wh
    • Battery Chemistry: LFP/LiFePO4
    • Expansion Capacity: Yes, secondary 1,024 Wh battery
    • Maximum AC Inverter Capacity: 1,800-2,200Wx
    • Maximum Solar DC Input Capacity: 500Wx
    • Panel to Generator Charge Interface: MC4 to XT-60
    • Output Ports: (6) 110V AC (2 grounded), (4) 5V/2.4A USB-A (2 fast charge), (2) 100W USB PD, (2) DC 5521, (1) 12V car
    • App Managed: Yes
    • Weight: 27 pounds
    • Charge Time: 4 hours 
    • Panels Tested: EcoFlow 400W, EcoFlow 160W
    • Warranty: 2 Years

    The new LiFePO4/LFP-based 1024 Wh EcoFlow Delta 2 arrived towards the very end of our testing period, after we had already evaluated its predecessor, the original 1300 Wh Li-ion-NMC Delta. But after testing, the EcoFlow Delta 2 completely upset our decision matrix — it’s that good. With an expanded feature set and the latest technology and capabilities, it simply outperformed everything else in its class.

    A slimmed-down version of EcoFlow’s Delta Pro, the new Delta 2 uses the same LiFePO4/LFP battery chemistry and has Wi-Fi and Bluetooth onboard to enable smart management with an excellent, extremely detailed app with many configurable settings. The rear of the generator has two grounded AC ports, four ungrounded, and three 12V ports, with one car and a dual 5521 (for devices such as routers with barrel connectors where you might want to avoid the use of a power brick). An internal AC power supply simplifies cabling, and the EcoFlow Delta 2 has a dedicated AC power cord.

    Solar/12V charging uses an XT-60 modular connector and a PV4-to XT-60 adapter cable. It has a 500W DC solar input (allowing you to charge it using two of EcoFlow’s 160W panels, two 220W panels or a single 400W panel) or via an AC inverter (more on that later).

    The compact 160W/220W panels are light and easy to carry; with multiples a single person can easily carry them out one at a time, unzip them from their fabric cases, and lie them down on a driveway or pool deck area (which is exactly what we did with these) You can also prop them up easily using the carrying case, which doubles as a stand, but it might be good to have one other person help you with that. The 400W panel is larger, but is of the same folding, four-segment “floppy” or flexible design. It’s more cumbersome because of its large size and weight, and while a single person could lay it out flat, it took two of us to position it when we set it up on the stand.

    Connecting a single panel to the generator only requires using a single MC4 to XT-60 bridge cable that connects to the panel’s positive and negative wires (you can’t mix it up, it’s a “keyed” connection) and attaching the bridge cable to the rear of the panel. The generator does the rest and displays the incoming wattage on the display and in the app. If you need to connect more than one panel, they can be serialized by attaching the positive pole of the MC4 connection of the first panel to a negative pole of the other panel, and then connecting the bridge cable to the other positive and negative poles. This can be done for up to three 160W panels on the Delta 2, for a maximum power input of 480W. EcoFlow also has a “parallel” connector cable to simplify this if you need to, particularly in situations where you might use three or more panels, but we did not have one of these for testing.

    Like its big sibling, the Delta 2 is expandable. While its onboard battery capacity is slightly smaller than the similarly priced units we tested, you can double the power of the EcoFlow Delta 2 to 2,048 Wh with an expansion battery unit. (The battery expansion port is on the side and uses a thick proprietary connector cord.) That gives you the flexibility of choosing portability over power, or should you realize you need more “oomph” after the fact. The 1,200W of AC input capacity (up to 1,500W with the additional battery pack connected) allows it to charge quickly.

    That said, given the high AC draw, we recommend you use the app and limit the input to 800W or less unless you have nothing else plugged into the circuit when charging it. We managed to trip a breaker charging the unit from a shared circuit in our garage charging at the default maximum speed setting in the app. While it’s easy enough to reset a breaker, it is not something you want to deal with when it’s easily avoidable using the Delta 2’s well-thought-out management features.

    The Delta 2 lets you charge from AC and solar simultaneously; we tried this setup and the unit prioritizes AC over solar most of the time (not a surprise given that the AC side of the unit supplies more current and solar is subject to variable weather conditions and solar exposure). It’s a useful option for faster charging or keeping the unit consistently charged without relying entirely on the grid.

    While the main display is simple enough, most users will likely want to use the app for monitoring status and adjusting settings. It allows you to control multiple EcoFlow devices at once and get real-time information about the state of charge and power flow. You also can alter settings, such as turning ports on and off, adjusting input wattage and upgrading firmware.

    We used the unit in both 1,024 Wh and 2,048 Wh configurations with the external battery. Given the 27-pound weight of the generator (and slightly less for the external battery) we found it fairly easy to drag around the house in two separate parts if we needed to move it away from its primary charging position on the patio. We had no issues running our maximum loads with the EcoFlow Delta 2, particularly when the second battery was connected and using a single 400W panel.

    In our estimation, the Delta 2 with an extra battery for a total of 2,048 Wh of capacity and 400W of solar panels is probably the “sweet spot” for a small family looking for an emergency backup generator to cover essentials. 100W to 300W of variable output is a realistic load to plan for if you consider the typical appliances that might be connected in an emergency scenario, such as lower-wattage LED lights (typically in the 10W to 20W range), a small refrigerator, fans, personal electronics and higher-wattage small appliances for cooking for 10-20 minutes at a time. We found that with this setup we were able to go for at least three to five days using our 60W-200W variable test load under medium cloud conditions, with plenty of capacity left on hand.

    The EcoFlow Delta Pro solar generator, with an extension battery, set up side by side on a stone patio

    Key specs

    • Battery Capacity: 3,600 Wh
    • Battery Chemistry: LFP/LiFePO4
    • Expansion Capacity: Yes, add up to two 3,600 Wh batteries for a total of 10,800 Wh
    • Home Electrical Panel Integration: Yes, with a proprietary transfer switch
    • Maximum AC Inverter Capacity: up to 4,500W
    • Maximum Solar DC Input Capacity: 1,600W
    • Panel to Generator Charge Interface: MC4 to XT-60
    • Output Ports: (4) 110V AC, (1) 30A 125V, (4) 5V/2.4A USB-A (2 fast charge), (2) 100W USB PD, (2) DC 5521, (1) 12V car, (1) 12.6V 30A Anderson Powerpole
    • App Managed: Yes
    • Weight: 99 lbs
    • Charge Time: 4 hours (1.7 hours with X-Stream Adapter and 40A L2 EV Charger)
    • Panel Tested: EcoFlow 400W
    • Warranty: 3 Years (with registration)

    The EcoFlow Delta Pro, released in 2021, is similar to the Delta 2 in overall design and basic capabilities, with the latest LiFePO4/LFP battery chemistry, onboard Bluetooth and Wi-Fi that let you access the smart battery management system via a well-designed app, an integrated power supply, MC4 to XT-60 solar input connectivity and an identical informative display.

    But the Delta Pro is a much bigger unit, and not just physically. The Delta Pro’s base battery capacity is 3,600 Wh, so if you are driving a 200W load, you can run it for 18 hours before depleting the battery, assuming there’s no recharge. And if that’s not enough, it can accommodate two additional 3,600 Wh batteries (connected with thick proprietary charging cables) for up to 10,800 Wh capacity, which begins to compete with gas generators. The inverter can drive up to 4,500W of load from its four 120V AC, six USB ports, three 12V, a 12V 30 Anderson connector, and a 30A 125V RV port.

    For most people that should be enough to power even some larger appliances like a refrigerator or freezer. along with lighting and personal electronics through a power outage. Since it is a viable alternative to smaller gas or propane/natural gas generators, you can buy EcoFlow’s Smart Home Panel, a transfer switch with a subpanel that lets you directly connect two EcoFlow Pros (each with up to two additional batteries) to your home electrical system and power up to 10 circuits.

    With all of that on tap, the Delta Pro is physically large. It weighs 99 pounds, though it has integrated wheels with a pull-out handle, so you can roll it (more like drag it) to wherever it needs to be.

    The 400W panels weigh just over 35 pounds each. As we noted with the Delta 2, the 400W panels use MC4-type locking connectors and are built with a folding, four-segment “floppy” or flexible construction, which can be used flat or angled. They come in heavy fabric carrying bases which function as an angular stand and use carabiner clips to connect to the panel.

    The 400W panels are more cumbersome than the 160W panels supplied with the smaller EcoFlow units, and you may need two people to position them when the stand is used. The panels are IP68 rated, meaning they can handle being rained on — and during the testing period, sitting out on our driveway for weeks at a time in the South Florida summer, they were rained on continuously. They continued to operate flawlessly despite the deluges.

    You can charge from solar or AC. The solar input lets you connect up to four 400W panels at 1,600W. You can charge from a 120V outlet, of course, but to fill this monster at high speeds, EcoFlow sells an “X-Stream” adapter that allows you to use a J1772 connector (like a Level 2 240V 40A/50A EV charging circuit) to fill the 3,600 Wh battery at over 3,000W.

    But that doesn’t mean you can’t overtax your home electrical circuit trying to AC charge it. We did encounter an issue where the power draw during 110V AC charging exceeded the capacity of the shared circuit (15A) to which the Delta Pro was connected; it caused the breaker to flip. To address this, we isolated the device to its own circuit and lowered the AC power draw in the app to a more modest 800W, which, as with the Delta 2, we suggest you do unless your circuit is sufficient to handle AC charging at the maximum draw.

    There wasn’t a load we could throw at this unit it could not handle, including 1,800W espresso machines, induction cookers and hair dryers in addition to our lineup of personal electronics, fans and small appliances. To really stress out the Delta Pro we used dual True 2A rated 24-inch undercounter commercial refrigerators, which had a peak draw of about 480W when the compressors were running at full blast, both at the same time.

    In a continual consumption scenario with no solar connection for recharging, according to the built-in display and the app (as we were monitoring it) the 3,600 Wh battery on the Delta Pro would deplete in seven and a half hours, and with a single external battery, in about 14 or 15 hours with a total of 7,200 Wh. Adding a second battery (we’re extrapolating, since we didn’t test with a second battery) would provide about 22 hours of continuous draw (and that’s without a solar panel hooked up).

    In real-world use, with only periodic compressor bursts from the refrigerators and twin 400W panels giving us at least 550W of continual recharge at about 70% efficiency during the day, we didn’t tax the Delta Pro much at all. Similarly, using a 1,800W induction cooker, running a boiling pot of water, continuously, got us about two hours of total use from a fully charged single battery with no solar recharging, but that’s not a realistic application. Yu’d use an appliance like this for only about 15 to 20 minutes at a time to make meals, and we rarely ran it above 800W-1,000W for medium-heat cooking. Practically, it doesn’t make a dent.

    So did we max out the capabilities of this monster setup? No, not by any means. And realistically, your typical family running emergency loads will not either. Suffice it to say, this bodes well for the Delta Pro’s usefulness in emergency situations, and at the very least it should be a good solution to avoid having to toss a fridge or freezer full of food after a long power outage.

    EcoFlow even sells a setup meant to address a particularly challenging situation: the EV charging adapter lets you use the NEMA TT-30 30A 125V port with a grounding adapter to charge an electric car. Just be aware that EV batteries are really big, so you can’t expect to fill up that easily, at least not right out of the box. With the base 3.6 kWh in the Delta Pro, you only get about 5% charge on a 77 kWh battery or a 15% charge with 10.8 kWh if both external batteries are connected. With 1,600W of panels connected, you could fully charge your vehicle in a day or two (perhaps three) if solar conditions are optimal, but it’s a bit of a stretch and you wouldn’t be able to use it for anything else. But if you’re stuck in a snowy cabin with a pooped-out electric vehicle, you should be able to get enough charge to make it to a charging station.

    First off, a solar generator isn’t really a “generator.” It’s a large rechargeable battery pack (not that different from the devices you might carry around to charge your phone while traveling), integrating an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) with surge protection and an inverter and line conditioner to power your AC devices.

    These devices are known as “solar generators” because they’re designed to be charged using a solar panel, making them suitable for long-term use in emergencies or off the grid (they can also be charged from a wall outlet). A wide range of battery capacities are available, from large models that can keep critical appliances going and the lights on during an emergency, to lightweight models more suitable for camping or tailgating.

    In order to supply power to a wide range of devices, solar generators offer a variety of AC outlets, 12V DC ports, a standard cigarette lighter port and 5521 barrel-type ports, in addition to Anderson power ports. The more sophisticated, higher-power generators may also have 125V 30A outlets for powering an RV. Some solar generators can directly integrate with home generator transfer panels to power AC circuits.

    Solar generators also come with USB ports for charging phones and small devices. The number of USB ports varies from two to four on smaller units and can be as high as six to eight on larger units, with a mix of USB-A 2.4v and 5V ports and USB-C with power delivery (PD) ports from 18W to 100W capacities.

    In addition to basic watt-hour and inverter capacities, solar generators have different types of ports for connecting various devices. The number of 120V AC ports is typically one or two on smaller units and three to six on medium and larger units. The inverters on the generators themselves, however, have a maximum wattage rating, so nothing stops you from plugging a power strip into a single AC port and using the maximum wattage of the generator.

    The inverters on the generators we reviewed are “pure sinewave,” which is the cleanest power you can get from an AC generator. They create a steady, continuous wave of electricity providing a smooth, oscillating current, also known as power conditioning. Some electronics require pure sinewave electricity, such as medical equipment and other appliances with AC motors, pumps and compressors.

    Some solar generators have integrated power supplies for fast charging and can be directly connected using cables to external 110V AC and 12V DC power sources. In contrast, others use transformer bricks similar to ones you see on other consumer appliances such as personal computers. A separate power supply typically generates less heat and somewhat lowers the generator’s weight, making the cabling more complicated. The larger units typically also include integrated fans to cool the battery compartment; the battery management system controls them and spins them up and down as needed.

    LED and LCDs on these devices display basic data such as state of charge, current wattage output, input and estimated times until charge and depletion (some also have touchscreen user interfaces). Some generators also have wireless capabilities and are managed using a mobile application using Bluetooth and Wi-Fi. The benefit is remote visibility into real-time generator performance from the comfort of wherever you want to view it and alter any settings that may be needed, such as activating and deactivating inverter ports, changing inverter charge speed so as not to overtax a circuit and updating the firmware.

    How to choose and use a solar generator

    The performance of solar generators is measured in watt hours (Wh). For example, imagine you have a load of 100W (which may be typical of a large fan and a portable refrigerator), and your solar generator’s capacity is 1,000 Wh. Then you could keep the load (the fan and portable fridge) for approximately 10 hours before the battery power is depleted (assuming there is no interim recharge by your solar panels, as happens at night).

    When operating a solar generator, shield it from the elements somewhere like behind your front door, on a covered porch/patio or inside a vehicle. Some solar panels are rated for continuous outdoor use and are weatherproofed. However, the generators should never be exposed to water, rain or extreme heat. For this reason, we also recommend purchasing extension cables for optimizing generator/panel placement. In our testing, we used 25-foot extensions, so we had a sufficient length between the panels and the generator.

    The heart of any solar generator unit, the cell is where chemical energy is stored for use as electrical energy. Cells have used a variety of lithium-based chemical formulations; many batteries have used Lithium-Ion Nickel Manganese Cobalt (NMC) though Lithium Iron Phosphate (LFP), also referred to by its chemical formula LiFePO4, has gained popularity in the industry lately since it allows for faster charging and discharging and many more charge cycles and it lasts longer.

    NMC batteries are, however, more common, since they are lighter and more energy-dense (and smaller, which is why you see them in smartphones, tablets, smartwatches and portable batteries). However, they have relatively slow charge and discharge rates, which makes them less efficient in use (in the battery world, the measurement of charge speed and rate of depletion/discharge are known as the C rating, and higher is faster).

    In addition to having a lower C rating than LFP batteries, Lithium Ion-NMC batteries only have a lifespan of about 500 full charge cycles. In contrast, LFP batteries can handle over 3,000 cycles. LFP batteries also don’t generate as much heat as NMC batteries, making them safer and ideal for use in solar generators and electric vehicles.

    The BMS, a microprocessor-controlled device embedded in the solar generator, combined with software algorithms, ensures the battery’s safety and longevity by regulating the charging and discharging of the cells. It accomplishes this by monitoring the voltage and current of each cell in the battery pack and balancing them as needed. The BMS also shuts down the system if it detects an unsafe condition, such as over-voltage or over-temperature.

    The inverter converts the direct current (DC) output from the batteries and the solar panels to the alternating current (AC) that your home uses (for lamps, appliances and most gadgets). The inverter on a solar generator is rated in output watts (W). A small generator typically has a rating of about 500W, a medium-sized about 1,200W, and a large unit 2,000W or higher.

    In other words, the output wattage gives you an idea of how many devices can draw power from the generator simultaneously. A single electric fan might have a maximum draw of 70W, but a hairdryer or a portable induction burner running at maximum power may draw as much as 1,600W to 1,800W and overtax a medium-sized unit. Inverters also handle the combined input wattage from AC and DC power, so your maximum solar panel capacity is determined by the inverter’s capacity. If your inverter has a maximum input capacity of 400W, you cannot use more than two 200W panels or four 100W panels.

    A solar panel comprises photovoltaic (PV) cells that convert sunlight into direct current (DC) electricity. In a home setup, the DC current is then sent to an inverter, which is converted into alternating current (AC), the type of electricity used in your home. In a solar generator, energy is stored in the battery cells for conversion to AC (or use as DC) later.

    Solar panels integrate with solar generators using MPPT (maximum power point tracking) controllers. MPPT is a standard technology that manages the conversion from panel output. Generally speaking, any MPPT-compatible panel from any manufacturer can be used with any solar generator, providing the correct connector cables and adapters are also used (such as Anderson, MC4/PV4, XT-30/XT-60, and various barrel connectors) and that the maximum voltage and combined input wattage into your inverter is not exceeded. However, it is possible to run into cable incompatibilities and capacity mismatches, so we’d recommend you pair panels sold by your generator manufacturer with your generator for the highest compatibility and optimal performance.

    A solar panel’s performance depends on atmospheric conditions and your panel efficiency; inverters are about 95% efficient. That is: Is the sun shining? Even if you have a panel rated at 100W, you may find that it doesn’t work as well in cloudy or hazy weather, or if the panels are not in direct sunlight, or depending on the sun’s orientation during the day. Your panels could operate at 50% or less efficiency, maybe 50W. We never saw any manufacturer’s panels performing higher than 80% efficiency during our testing in South Florida during the summer of 2022, where we had light to medium cloud cover. Therefore, when making recharge calculations against the watt-hour capacity of your generator, assume a panel efficiency of 50% or less, depending on your typical weather conditions.

    Solar panels are rated by their power output in watts, and portable panel sizes can range from as small as 50 watts to as high as 400 watts. You’ll want to make sure you do not exceed the maximum input capacity of the generator from the panel array; most MPPT charge controllers do not allow you to hook up panels that exceed voltage requirements. Some vendors (such as Goal Zero) will enable you to “oversubscribe” your panel wattage (such as using 1,200W of total capacity when the inverter input capacity is only 600W) during less favorable conditions. However, once the conditions become favorable again, any excess energy is lost as heat.

    Depending on its design, a solar generator may be able to accommodate multiple solar panels hooked up in parallel, connected by long cables that use a variety of different types of connectors, which vary by manufacturer. Some panels are of a rugged, heavier, foldable metal design (also referred to as “briefcase”), and others are of a flexible, floppy design. Although they are heavier, these panels are generally easier to set up due to their rigid structure, and a single person can easily set up multiple panels. Briefcase designs are typically outdoor-rated, designed for continuous use and can be rained on without damaging the components.

    In contrast, the larger floppy designs can be more challenging to set up by a single person, are typically not rated by the manufacturer for continuous outdoor use and are recommended to be removed from the elements during bad weather. However, in most cases, this only applies to the cable connections, so if you seal those with duct tape, there’s no reason why you can’t leave such solar panels outside for days at a time; we certainly did for our testing, and we encountered no malfunctions.

    A solar generator set up on a patio, with multiple cable runs visible between patio furniture as well as an Astro refrigerator

    All generators were tested from June through August 2022 in variable sun conditions and varying weather. Generators were placed on a covered patio away from the elements. Long extension cables were connected to the panels placed outside the patio on a large outdoor pool deck. Panels were left outside for a week at a time.

    The test load included two 70W stand fans, a 60W AstroAI 15L refrigerator/freezer run at -4 degrees Fahrenheit for maximum load and 20W of LED lamps. Incidental loads included a 1,800W portable induction burner, a 1,800W espresso machine, a 1,600W hair dryer and dual 2A 240W commercial refrigerators. Various generators charged other generators to test maximum inverter loads. 15A and 20A circuits with GFCI were used for AC charging generators when solar conditions were unfavorable or to test dual-charging configurations.

    We measured whether the units were able to handle the test loads in terms of total wattage draw on the inverter, and measured how long it took for the battery to run out under typical real-world loads with the solar panels attached.

    We paid careful attention to ease of setup and use, simplicity of monitoring and industrial design and build quality issues, looking at how the design affected performance and use, potential issues with the durability of components, and the terms of the manufacturer’s warranty.

    Founded in 2012, Jackery is one of the oldest companies in the portable power station industry, and was key in popularizing these types of products. Its 500 series power station has been on the market since 2019 and is one of the most popular small solar generators. With its friendly industrial design and bright orange-and-black utilitarian look with monochrome LCD, it has spawned many clones.

    The Explorer 500’s battery chemistry also puts it behind the times. It uses a Lithium-Ion NMC battery, which runs hotter, charges more slowly and offers shorter lifespans with fewer charge cycles. That said, NMC batteries are lighter and more energy-dense, and the Explorer 500 is a solid, affordable performer, though it lacks up-to-date features like USB-C PD outputs for faster charging of modern portable electronics, still offering only USB-A ports. In addition to an external AC adapter that connects to its barrel-style DC power port, it uses a proprietary Jackery-to-barrel cable for its solar connection.

    The Jackery 1000 Pro is the popular battery brand’s newest portable power station, but as with its smaller sibling, it’s a bit behind the competition at this point. It uses a Lithium-Ion NMC, and with its larger battery pack, it needs more cooling than similarly sized LFP-based devices. Jackery claims 1,000 charge cycles, however, perhaps enabled by the unit’s dual onboard fans. We’d expect these to run quite a bit at higher loads. That said, given that NMC batteries are lighter and more energy-dense, the 1000 Pro packs a solid amount of capacity into a lightweight case. It’s got more contemporary USB-C PD ports on board as well, making it more useful all around with today’s mobile devices and laptops.

    For fast charging you can use a lot of panels. Large proprietary dongles connect to two Jackery panel cables, which attach to twin barrel-shaped solar connector jacks, letting you use up to four 200W panels on the 1000 Pro, which can get you a full charge in under two hours. The dongles aren’t used in simple two-panel or single-panel configurations.

    While it’s nice to have the options, we felt the extra connectors made for overly complex cable runs, and worry about difficulties in diagnosing problems should something go haywire. Also, unlike cables using locking MC4, Anderson or XT60 connectors, these cables can be disconnected by a simple tug, so you’ll want to watch out for dogs, kids or simple clumsiness.

    We had no issues running our test loads on 1000 Pro, and Jackery has one of the industry’s better warranties, providing up to five years of coverage if products are purchased directly from the company or an authorized reseller (Amazon works, if you fill out an application on Jackery’s site after purchasing). While we think for the long term purchasers would be better served going with a LiFePO4/LFP-based unit, Jackery’s warranty provides some peace of mind for those more comfortable with the older Lithium-Ion NMC-based technology.

    The Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro, the bigger model in the popular company’s lineup, uses the same Lithium-ion NMC battery technology and floppy-style, 18.2-pound SolarSaga 200W panels as the 1000 Pro, connecting with the same dongles to support up to six panels on this model for fast charging and supplying 2,160 watt-hours of capacity.

    Like its smaller siblings, the Explorer 2000 Pro proved an able performer in our testing and had no trouble pushing the loads we connected. Plus it is covered by Jackery’s long warranty if you buy direct. It just isn’t the most up-to-date solar generator, so especially at this capacity and price, we’d suggest looking at something more up to date.

    With a design very much like Jackery’s but with LiFePO4/LFP cells under the hood, the Oupes 1800, which offers 1,488 watt-hours of battery capacity and an 1,800W AC inverter, sits between the Jackery 1000 and 2000. It may fit the bill, though it doesn’t offer as long a warranty, nor does the brand have as long a history in power stations.

    We hooked the Oupes up to Jackery and Geneverse’s 200W panels and cabling (both of which appear to come from the same factory) and its own floppy four-segment 100W panels, which also appear quite similar to Jackery’s in design, and got good results all around. That said, we’d probably look to more established brands for this sort of product.

    Previously known as Generark, and like Oupes and numerous others, Geneverse is also making LFP-based Jackery lookalikes, which includes selling panels that are spitting images of the SolarSaga 200W, except that they are grey. Otherwise the cabling and dongle setup is identical to what Jackery sells currently for its 1000 Pro and 2000 Pro line.

    Their HomePower One Pro eschews the orange and black color palette of the Jackery 1000 Pro, opting for a dark plastic grey casing and a blue and black display with a data layout similar to its competitors. It has a 1,210 Wh battery, a 1,200W inverter and an 800W DC input, giving it a slight edge over the Jackery 1000 Pro in power output.

    Geneverse’s other advantages over the Jackery 1000 Pro include Wi-Fi-based app management, but we thought the app wasn’t nearly sophisticated or as well-designed as what we saw from EcoFlow, Goal Zero or even Bluetti. Its functionality is pretty basic, and felt its connectivity was not particularly reliable.

    Geneverse provides a five-year warranty if you buy directly from the company.

    Goal Zero, founded in 2009, is one of the standard-setters for the portable solar power station industry. It’s known for making well-made, exceptionally engineered products for people who work and play outdoors. The devices are expandable, utilizing the company’s Yeti Link/Yeti Tank 1,200 Wh lead acid battery technology, and can also power up to four of your home circuits with their Home Integration Kit transfer switch and subpanel.

    The Yeti 1500X is a powerful mid-size solar generator with a 1,516 Wh battery based on lithium-ion NMC chemistry. It can drive 2,000W of connected load with its inverter and can charge at up to 600W DC.

    It boasts an excellent app with smart systems management and notifications with reliable Bluetooth and Wi-Fi connectivity (in our testing, the Goal Zero app and smart functionality stood out in particular, excelling compared to most products we looked at). Goal Zero is also one of the few manufacturers using a briefcase-style metal outdoor-rated panel design for its 100W and 200W panels, making it ideal for longer-term installations. The panels use Anderson-style parallel connections, which are more rugged than those used by most of the competition, and the cables are thicker. Despite their increased heft, we felt the Goal Zero panels were easier to set up than their “floppy” competitors due to their rigidity and stability.

    When charging with AC, the Yeti uses an external power adapter connected to the single Anderson charge port to reduce excess heat. Unlike several other devices we looked at, you can’t “dual charge” the Yeti with both AC and solar connected simultaneously.

    Despite employing less desirable battery chemistry than their competitors, the products performed exceptionally well with our test loads. Additionally, their rugged designs would be a good choice for many outdoor sporting/recreation and work scenarios. While we think overall LiFePO4-based designs are a better investment at this point, especially when you’re spending this much money, the Goal Zero Yeti models are solid, dependable and highly usable alternatives.

    If you want something big and built for the outdoors, the Goal Zero Yeti 3000X is a larger version of the company’s 1500X power station. Like its smaller sibling, it has a 2,000W inverter and can charge at 600W DC. The primary difference between the two is that the 1500X has a 1,516 Wh battery and bigger, heavier 3000X (which can roll on wheels) has a 3,032 Wh battery.

    If you need the additional capacity but want to stick with the tried and true, or need the Goal Zero’s bulletproof build and well-designed system of cables, panels, and accessories the Yeti 3000x maks a lot of sense.

    Until the EcoFlow Delta 2 showed up, the Anker 757 was our category winner for a medium-sized solar generator. It is still a strong contender, with LiFePO4/LFP battery chemistry and a good combination of features and performance at its price point. A 1,200 Wh LFP battery and six AC ports on its 1,500W inverter, plus a wide variety of USB and other DC outputs (as you’d expect given Anker’s background in mobile device charging) make it a versatile and capable unit.

    The Anker 757 does, however, lack the app management features of its competitors, it has no expansion capability and the unit is heavy for its size. Considering the inverter and battery size, we also felt the DC input capacity — only 300W — was anemic, making for slower charging than its competition. However, Anker boasts one of the best warranties in the industry, at five years, so it may still be a good choice for those who intend to use it heavily.

    The Lion Energy Safari ME is a small solar generator meant to be used with a large expansion battery as part of a bigger setup. Like the Goal Zero units, it boasts a heavy-duty design and uses outdoor-rated “briefcase” style 100W folding metal panels connected with thick cables terminating in Anderson connections. The 922Wh base LiFePO4/LFP battery is on the small side for other generators at this price point, but the device is expandable to 2,970 Wh, and has a 2,000W inverter capacity.

    We liked the ruggedized metal build of the unit. Still, we wished the 585W DC solar input was higher, and the panel capacity was 200W (or higher) like Goal Zero’s, as they aren’t very space-efficient for the amount of power they generate. We also discovered the unit employs an electromechanical switch (rather than digital) for locking onto AC versus DC solar inputs and isn’t designed to be plugged into both simultaneously. If you do, the generator clicks rapidly (and loudly) when there’s no solar input power at night — an issue the company is looking to resolve in the next hardware release.

    With so many new expandable models on the market, the Lion Energy Safari ME isn’t that great a value proposition. It is very expensive for the capacity the base unit offers out of the box, and even pricier when expanded to near 3,000 Wh compared to its competitors. In addition to a lack of app management, we felt that the unit was also short on the number and capabilities of AC and USB ports compared to its competitors. Given the “industrial” design and price point, we feel it should have a more extended warranty than a single year.

    As with EcoFlow and its Delta Pro, Bluetti is pushing the envelope on what a solar generator can do. With 2,048 Wh of LiFePO4/LFP battery capacity onboard, a full range of AC and DC outputs (including a 30A 125V NEMA TT-30 outlet for RV power and two 15W wireless charging pads) and the ability to add an additional 4,096 Wh capacity with dual 2,048 Wh B230 LFP batteries, for a total of 6,144 Wh, you can build a very large system around the AC200MAX. (If that’s not enough, Bluetti offers the 5,100 Wh EP500 and the 3,072 Wh AC500, which is expandable to 18,000 Wh of capacity for a whole-house emergency solution.)

    As with EcoFlow and Goal Zero, Bluetti has a sophisticated app, though it only has Bluetooth connectivity, not Wi-Fi. We found that it lost connection more often than the competition, and we had to reestablish it manually. The generator has a touchscreen display that allows you to configure every option, however, so an app isn’t essential to get the most use out of the AC200MAX.

    We had no issues with test loads on the device, and the company’s floppy 350W panels were easy to hook up and performed well. If you are looking for a generator with a lot of battery power and expansion capabilities at a reasonable price point, the AC200MAX would be a good choice, though EcoFlow’s Delta lineup is a bit easier to use and manage.

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • Best plant identification apps for mobile in 2023, tested by our editors | CNN Underscored

    Best plant identification apps for mobile in 2023, tested by our editors | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    Spring has officially sprung and people will be spending more time in the great outdoors as the season gears up. Whether you’re looking for help in identifying plants along your morning hike or in designing the flower or food garden of your dreams, there is a mobile plant identification app that can help you. Ditto if you’re wondering if that glossy leaf your loved one pulled up while camping is poison ivy, if that house plant your cat just nibbled on will make it sick, or for any particular reason you may have.

    “We are driven to identify plants for many reasons,” explains Erin C. Hill, Ph.D., an Academic Specialist in the Department of Plant, Soil and Microbial Sciences at Michigan State University (MSU). “Sometimes it is a curiosity about the world around us,” she writes, and at “other times it is out of the desire or need to manage areas like gardens, agricultural fields, restored habitats, and/or natural preserves.” Dr. Hill’s responsibilities include collaborating on plant and seed identification as a member of MSU’s Plant & Pest Diagnostics team.

    In her article, Dr. Hill discusses how plant identification apps for smartphones have seen “significant improvements” over the past several years, and how these apps offer folks “the opportunity to take a photo and get an instant identification in many cases.” With this in mind, we’ve tested five plant identification apps available on Android and iOS that you can use to quickly find out what plant you’re interested in, whether you’re hiking outdoors with loved ones or starting an indoor garden that you want your pets to be safe around.

    Over the course of several weeks, we’ve tested FlowerChecker, LeafSnap Premium by Appixi, PlantID by Control, PlantNet and PlantSnap Pro on a Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 4 smartphone. Ultimately, we named PlantNet our top overall pick due to its level of accuracy that made the process of identifying our test plants a breeze.

    Best plant identification app for mobile overall

    During testing, we found PlantNet easy to use, accurate and fast. This free app guides you during setup, lets you search by map or flora, and suggests you enable geolocation (GPS) to improve its plant identification.

    PlantNet was the fastest, most accurate plant identification app tested on our Android phone. We found the app easy to use, highly accurate and able to provide fast identification.

    • Pricing: Free
    • Supported platforms: Android, iOS, web
    • Supported languages: 45 languages including Arabic, Bulgarian, Chinese, Dutch, English, French, Greek, Italian, Japanese, Persian, Polish, Portuguese, Slovak, Spanish and Turkish
    • Key features: Collaborative user platform; searchable database containing over 45 floras and 46,050 species; plants are searchable by theme (invasive plants, useful plants, weeds and world flora) or by geographical flora map (plants found in Africa, Asia, Central America, Europe, North America and Oceania-Pacific); identify plants by their leaf, flower, fruit or bark; enable geolocation (GPS) to improve identification

    PlantNet is a collaborative “citizen science project” dedicated to worldwide plant biodiversity monitoring. The mobile app launched in 2013 and the app, along with a web version, was made available for both botanists and the general public. Since then, anyone all over the world can use the app to take a photo of a plant and send it to the app for identification.

    How PlantNet works

    The app is based on image recognition and relies on member involvement, so it’s important to provide it with quality images. So, first, you take a photo and send it to the app. Next, it automatically compares the image to the thousands of images other users have added to its botanical database. Then, the app lets you view a list of potential species that might match. You then “vote” for the species that seems to be the right one. The algorithm collects that information and analyzes it against the database’s images from other users. It then decides the plant’s identity and informs you of the decision. PlantNet claims its database contains over 45 floras and 46,050 plant species.

    PlantNet’s origins and sponsors

    PlantNet was developed by computer engineers and botanists from a consortium that has gathered multiple French research institutes as sponsors of the project, including the French National Research Institute for Sustainable Development (IRD), the French Agricultural Research Centre for International Development (CIRAD), the National Institute of Agricultural Research (INRA), the French Institute for Research in Computer Science and Automation (INRIA) and the Tela Botanica network. It is supported by the Agropolis Foundation.

    Easy setup, helpful advice

    Installation of PlantNet on our Android smartphone was a breeze. Once installed, the app gave us the choice to follow its guided setup screens or to skip them. Initially, we planned to skip them but, ultimately, we decided to follow the guided prompts since the app advised us we’d get better, more accurate identifications if we did. In no time, we successfully created our account. Users can immediately join different Groups, which are collections of users who share common interests or geographical location. We joined some groups that interested us. PlantNet’s five most popular groups each contain over 1,000 members. The app’s most popular groups are:

    • Flowers of France,
    • Plants of Europe,
    • Medicinal plants, herbs, and foraging for wild edibles,
    • Cactus and succulents, and
    • Houseplants.

    PlantNet also offers helpful advice on how to take a good plant picture for the app, and provides examples of what they don’t want and what they do want, which we appreciated as we began testing.

    • Step 1: Use your smartphone’s camera to zoom in on one flower (or leaf, fruit, stem),
    • Step 2: Click on the in-frame item to focus on it, and
    • Step 3: Take the picture, making sure it contains just one organ (item) and is centered, sharp, without fingers, and has a natural or neutral, blurred background.
    PlantNet offers helpful advice on how to take a good plant picture for the app, including bad examples of what they do not want and good examples of what they do want.

    Accurate plant identification

    PlantNet can identify plants and trees by analyzing a photo of their leaf, flower, fruit or bark. The app guided us to an easy-to-use screen where we could snap a plant’s photo and ask for an identification back. We took a photo of each of our test plants both inside our local garden center and at home. We then asked PlantNet to identify each plant and waited for the answer. The whole process of snapping a pic and then receiving an answer took mere seconds each time. PlantNet correctly identified all of the plants we asked it to, down to the finest detail. The app was able to tell us that the flower in question was not only a tulip, for example, but that it was Didier’s tulip (Tulipa gesneriana), a species of plant in the Liliaceae (or lily) family. Other apps we tested weren’t so detailed and accurate.

    In our local garden center, we used the PlantNet app on our Samsung smartphone to identify these pretty flowers. PlantNet quickly and correctly identified them as Didier’s tulips or Tulipa gesneriana, a species of plant in the Liliaceae (or lily) family.

    PlantNet recommended we enable its geolocation (GPS) feature to automatically and more accurately identify our plants, which we did. We could identify plants via the Map option or the Special Floras option. The Map option includes searches for plants found in Africa, Asia, North America, Canada, Central America, Europe, and Oceania-Pacific.

    The Special Floras option includes search themes such as World flora, Useful plants, Weeds, Invasive plants, Useful plants of Tropical Africa and Useful plants of Asia. You can also have it identify plants commonly found in regions, parks and protected areas.

    With PlantNet, you can identify plants using the Map or Special Floras options. Special Flora areas include regions, parks and protected areas, etc. The app recommends you enable geolocation (GPS) to improve the identification.

    Like most of the other apps we tested, PlantNet is available in multiple languages. The app can be used by plant enthusiasts all across the world for this reason. But at 45 languages, it supports the most of all the apps we tested, including Arabic, Bulgarian, Chinese, Dutch, English, French, Greek, Italian, Japanese, Persian, Polish, Portuguese, Slovak, Spanish and Turkish.

    There really wasn’t anything we didn’t like about PlantNet. This plant identification app does what it claims to do, and does it quickly and accurately.

    PlantNet was fast and highly accurate in our plant identification tests. Given that PlantNet is also free and easy to use, we recommend it as the go-to plant identification app for most people.

    best plant identification apps5_inline_cnnu

    If you or your loved ones are outdoors in nature for any reason, it’s important to avoid poisonous plants like poison ivy or poison oak since nobody wants the rash that can result from touching their leaves. Plant identification apps can help you identify harmless flowers and plants you may want to purchase for your garden or backyard but they can also help you avoid poisonous plants you may encounter. Just use your smartphone to snap a pic of the unknown plant to identify it before touching it.

    But we’re only human — what if you forget to take your smartphone on your hike or other outdoor activity? There are additional precautions you can take to avoid rashes from poisonous plants. Namely, be sure to educate yourself first before touching unknown plants. In its article, “Outsmarting Poison Ivy and Other Poisonous Plants,” the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) discusses how you can recognize poison ivy, poison oak and poison sumac. To avoid getting rashes, the FDA offers the following tips (which we’ve condensed and summarized):

    • Tip 1: Educate yourself. The FDA advises you to learn what poison ivy, oak, sumac and other poisonous plants look like so you can avoid them. Watch the FDA’s educational video on what to know.
    • Tip 2: Keep tools clean. According to the FDA, it is a good idea to wash your garden tools and gloves regularly. The FDA suggests wearing long sleeves, long pants (tucked into boots) and impermeable gloves if you think there’s a chance you might be working near poison ivy.
    • Tip 3: Wash your pet. The FDA says most pets are not sensitive to poison ivy, but the oil can stick to their fur and cause a reaction in someone who pets them. So, wash your pet if it was playing outside alone or was on a hike in the woods with you. The FDA points out that your pet may have brushed up against poison ivy, oak or sumac. Use pet shampoo and water to wash your pet, and the FDA again advises wearing impermeable gloves while doing so.
    • Tip 4: Clean yourself. Wash your skin in soap and cool water as soon as possible if you come in contact with a poisonous plant. The FDA says the sooner you clean your skin, the greater the chance you can remove the plant oil or help prevent further spread.
    These tulips are pretty but considered unsafe for dogs, cats and horses.

    Any new parent knows that baby-proofing the house is a crucial step in helping to keep their baby safe. Pet parents, too, need to be mindful of dangers lurking inside as well as outside the home. Did you know certain plants can be lethal to animals if ingested? In its article, “Potentially Dangerous Items for Your Pet,” the FDA notes the plants and flowers that can be harmful if your pet eats them. According to the FDA, the potentially dangerous items listed “can vary in how toxic they are to pets. Some may be only mildly toxic while others may cause severe illness or even death.”

    The FDA continues by pointing out that “the degree of toxicity often depends on several factors,” including the type of animal (cat, dog, or other species) that ate the item, how much the animal ate, and which part of the plant (bulb, flower or leaf) was eaten.

    Related: How to start an indoor garden and what to buy for one, according to experts

    You can also find toxicity information for plants from a pet poison control center such as the Animal Poison Control Center (APCC) of the American Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals (ASPCA). You can contact its APCC regarding any animal poison-related emergency at 888-426-4435, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. The ASPCA offers comprehensive, detailed lists of plants that are toxic and non-toxic to cats and dogs. The following are 10 plants commonly found in the home or in the yard that are toxic to dogs, cats and horses; they are listed in alphabetical order. Note the clinical signs of illness to watch out for.

    • Plant 1: Aloe VeraCan cause vomiting (not in horses), lethargy, diarrhea
    • Plant 2: Azalea Can cause vomiting (not in horses), diarrhea, weakness, cardiac failure
    • Plant 3: CarnationCan cause mild gastrointestinal signs, mild dermatitis
    • Plant 4: ChrysanthemumCan cause vomiting, diarrhea, hyper-salivation, incoordination, dermatitis
    • Plant 5: DaffodilCan cause vomiting, salvation, diarrhea; large ingestions cause convulsions, low blood pressure, tremors and cardiac arrhythmias. Bulbs are the most poisonous part
    • Plant 6: DaisyCan cause vomiting, diarrhea, hyper-salivation, incoordination, dermatitis
    • Plant 7: GeraniumCan cause vomiting, anorexia, depression, dermatitis
    • Plant 8: Hydrangea Can cause vomiting, depression, diarrhea
    • Plant 9: ParsleyCan cause photosensitization (sunburn, dermatitis); large amounts are needed to cause this effect
    • Plant 10: TulipCan cause vomiting, depression, diarrhea, hyper-salivation. Highest concentration of toxin in bulb
    This orchid is considered safe for this curious dog.

    We conducted part of our testing for this review in our local Pike’s Nurseries garden center. In its How-To section of its website, Pike’s Nurseries says that if pet parents have their heart set on owning a certain plant or plants, that they should do their “research and be strategic about placement (like hanging plants and tall shelves).”

    Pike’s Nurseries also suggests trying a faux version of a toxic houseplant to be completely safe. The following are some nontoxic house plants that the garden center says are safe for pets:

    best plant identification apps4_inline_cnnu

    During our pre-testing research, we found a large number of plant identification apps from which to choose. We selected our five candidates to test based on desired features, user reviews, and availability on at least Android and iOS mobile platforms. We downloaded each of the five plant identification apps to a Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 4 smartphone. We evaluated the apps based on their ease of installation and use, key features, pricing, any notable differentiators and the overall user experience.

    To test the accuracy of the identification processes, we made multiple trips to our local Pike’s Nursery (which is one of 15 garden centers in the metro Atlanta region of the United States). With their permission, we snapped photos of different plants on display inside the store. We had all the plant identification apps try to identify some Tulipa gesneriana (Didier’s tulips), Polyscias scutellaria (shield aralia or plum aralia), Ficus pumila (creeping fig or climbing fig) and Viola wittrockiana (garden pansy).

    We then compared all the apps’ accuracy and speed in their identifications. Since the plants were already identified by labels and signs in the store, all we had to do was note whether or not the apps’ identifications matched the plants’ store labels and signs. We also had all the apps try to identify a Schlumbergera (Christmas cactus), a plant we had inside our home during testing. We compared all the apps’ accuracy as they tried to identify this plant, too.

    For this review, we focused on how well each app would work for the average user, no matter the reason for using it — gardening, hiking, walking or various other outdoor activities. After all, if an app is hard to use, falters in key metrics such as accuracy or reliability, or otherwise presents obstacles while using, then the app can’t be deemed useful as a practical matter.

    best plant identification apps2_inline_cnnu

    • Pricing: Free to install but charges $1 per correct plant identification
    • Supported platforms: Android, iOS
    • Supported languages: English
    • Key features: Identification of plants, moss, lichens and fungi; identification is performed by international botanists and horticulture experts rather than by a computer algorithm. You take a photo of an unknown plant, send it to their team of experts and one or more of them will collaborate to identify it for you. They will provide the genus (taxonomy rank), species and the common name of the plant along with the level of certainty of the identification.

    FlowerChecker is a plant identification app that is easy to install and use but its plant identification process is much different than the rest of the apps we tested. And that’s because a team of human experts — botanists and horticulture professionals — do the actual plant identification work here, not artificial intelligence (AI) or other automation within the app.

    When we took a photo of each of our test plants and sent off our “What is this?” queries, the expert would respond with the correct identification. The experts are touted as being, well, experts, and they may very well be. However, they remained anonymous. We would have liked it better if they were identified by full name, title or other credentials.

    Also, the response time with FlowerChecker is unpredictable. It took as long as a day or more for us to get the results to some of our queries but, with others, we received results within an hour. There was just no way to tell in advance how long the question-and-answer process would take.

    FlowerChecker alerts you when your plant identification request is fulfilled and tells you which of its botanists answered your query. You will receive the Genus, Species and the Common name of the plant along with the level of certainty of the identification.

    FlowerChecker uses an unusual pricing model. It’s free to install but we had to pay one credit — or approximately one US dollar — before we could even see the results of our plant query. One credit per query can add up! So, the app gets the cash upfront, so to speak, for correct identifications. However, the good news is, the app only charges for accurate results. So, if the team cannot identify a plant correctly, the app lets you know you owe nothing, a nice touch.

    • Pricing: $5 per month (billed monthly) or $26 per year (billed annually). No free trial for Premium version
    • Supported platforms: Android, iOS
    • Supported languages: 23 languages including Arabic, Chinese, Dutch, English, French, Italian, Japanese, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish, Slovak and Turkish
    • Key features: Identification of plants, flowers, fruits and trees; searchable database containing over 32,000 plant species from all over the world; unlimited plant identification; unlimited reminders; step-by-step plant care guides; plant care reminders; ability to share identifications with friends; lets you create collections of your favorite plants

    LeafSnap Premium is simple to install and setup is a breeze. It has some accurate and easy-to-use features, too, including a basic plant Identifier and a deeper, more accurate Advanced Identify function. The Advanced Identify function can identify a plant in three ways: from a photo of the whole plant, from a photo of its flower or from its leaf only. Being able to identify a whole plant from just its leaf can come in handy for pet parents. If you have a cat and see a leaf hanging from said cat’s lip, for example, that may be enough to identify what the cat just bit into and whether or not that was a safe snack for kitty.

    LeafSnap Premium’s basic plant Identifier worked well, too, during our testing, providing mostly fast, accurate identifications in all of our test cases.

    There’s also a Diagnostics feature to help you figure out what to do to make your plant healthier, which can be handy if you’re clueless about plant woes and how to fix them.

    (left to right): Here we took a photo of the Polyscias scutellaria (Shield aralia) plants in our local nursery. LeafSnap Premium correctly identified their delicate, lacy green foliage as well as identified the Ficus pumila (Climbing fig) plants displayed next to them.

    LeafSnap Premium is available for $5 per month or $26 per year. This app’s annual cost is on the pricier end of the plant identification apps we tested, but it might be worth the expense if you need to use it for an extended period of time.

    • Pricing: After a three-day free trial, PlantID costs $10 per month (billed monthly)
    • Supported platforms: Android, iOS, web
    • Supported languages: English, Czech
    • Key features: Identification of over 12,000 plants including flowers, trees, bushes, fungi and lichens from all over the world; offers rock identification; Health Assessment feature identifies 100 plant diseases; uses machine learning (ML)

    PlantID is a plant identification app that is easy to install, set up and, for the most part, use. PlantID adds a fun additional feature to plant identification: rock identification. This can be neat for those interested in rocks for gardening purposes or just as a hobby.

    However, during testing, this feature brought up an unexpected result. When we took a photo of the tulips on display inside our local nursery, we asked the app to identify them. But we must have hit the wrong button in the app or included an item unseen to us in addition to the tulips in the photo. Why? Because we received a surprising and confusing identification: amethyst!

    Perhaps the app spotted an amethyst near the plant in the photo we took? Whatever the reason, the app identified the flower as an amethyst instead of a tulip. But when we tried again and this time hit the correct button, the app correctly identified the tulips. And much to our delight, PlantID also correctly identified the rest of our test plants.

    (left to right): Plant ID can identify both plants and rocks. When we snapped a photo of the yellow Viola wittrockiana, Plant ID initially and incorrectly identified them as an Amethyst (match rate: 21 percent). But we tried again and its second attempt was accurate (match rate: 57 percent).

    One thing we didn’t like was PlantID’s chintzy trial period. A three-day freemium potentially sets the user up to subscribe to the $10-per-month app before they realize the trial period has expired.

    • Pricing: After a seven-day free trial, PlantSnap Pro costs $20 per year (billed annually)
    • Supported platforms: Android, iOS
    • Supported languages: 37 languages including Arabic, Bulgarian, Chinese, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hebrew, Hindi, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Persian, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Spanish, Swedish and Turkish
    • Key features: Identification of plants, flowers, cacti, succulents and mushrooms; searchable database containing over 600,000 plants; the iOS version uses auto-detect, augmented reality (AR) and machine learning (ML); offers gardening tips and plant care instructions; lets you create collections of your favorite plants

    PlantSnap Pro is a plant identification app that is easy to install, set up and use. To set up, you just need to give the app access to your smartphone’s camera and gallery for the app to function. A couple of clicks later and the app is ready.

    This plant identification app offers some neat features we appreciated. Its “auto detect” feature can automatically find the plant in your photo and it helps you with cropping options, too. The app also offers guides to help you care for the plant and recommends a few products to help you care for it, too. (But you can skip that recommendation part entirely if you prefer.)

    The app has an active community of plant lovers who you can chat with to help resolve your plant issues, share photos, and dive into other plant-related discussions.

    All good things aside, PlantSnap Pro’s accuracy was more than a little off in two instances, which was disappointing. When we took a photo of a Christmas cactus on our table, the app incorrectly identified it as a Dracaena arborea. And inside our test nursery, the app identified Didier’s tulips as just generic tulips.

    (left to right): During testing we found PlantSnap’s accuracy to be a bit off, as it incorrectly identified more than one test plant. Here it identifies our Christmas Cactus (Schlumbergera sp.) as a Dracaena arborea.

    PlantSnap Pro offers a seven-day free trial, which is very much welcomed and gives you sufficient time to try out the app. Once you commit, its $20 annual cost is highly affordable.

    Read more from CNN Underscored’s hands-on testing coverage:

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • The best mops in 2023, tried and tested | CNN Underscored

    The best mops in 2023, tried and tested | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    You can sweep and vacuum all you like, but if you have hardwood, vinyl or tile floors and run into sticky residue or stuck-on grime, you’re going to have to mop. There’s good news, though. Mops have come a long way since the bulky, stringy, soggy swabbers of old, and are smaller, tidier and easier to use than ever. Most will be able to tackle a wide range of flooring types too, making it easy to get your entire home clean with fewer tools and a minimum of fuss.

    We put 11 popular mops, including string, spin, spray and pad models, to the test, evaluating them on how they performed while tackling three challenging cleaning tasks as well as on overall build and durability. We were able to confidently land on three favorites that should let you tackle any cleanup large or small, on any surface in your home.

    Best mop overall

    The O-Cedar EasyWring Microfiber Spin Mop combines a hands-free wringing bucket with lightweight, triangular mop head that’s perfect for both mopping and spot-scrubbing on any surface.

    Best mop for smaller jobs

    The Oxo Good Grips Microfiber Spray Mop Kit features a multifunctional design — providing two heads in one — making it a convenient tool to quickly grab and use for both quick cleanups.

    Best mop for hardwood floors

    If you’re looking for a mop specifically to take care of hardwood surfaces, the Bona Hardwood Floor Premium Spray Mop is simple and effective, and includes a bottle of Bona’s hardwood floor cleaner.

    O-cedar-spinner-best-mops-best-overall

    Wringing out a mop head is generally a messy task, but the new generation of spin mops has made the task a lot easier. The O-Cedar EasyWring Spin Mop has the process dialed in, making it easy to keep your mop head clean and ready to go. It’s also a solidly built mop with a smart, easy-to-handle design that did a great job scrubbing up dirt and grime in our tests.

    A manual foot pedal on the rear of the EasyWring bucket powers a spinning basket that, when a wet mop head is placed inside, quickly removes excess liquid. It works extremely quickly, and since you don’t have to bend over or even use your hands at all, it really cuts down on overall cleaning time. It felt solid and durable as well, even when pumping away as hard as I could, and never felt like it was vulnerable to cracking or snapping.

    The mop itself is comfortable to use and its lightweight design means it’s easy to carry around and maneuver while you mop. You can even adjust the length from 24 to 48 inches to suit your height or the reach your job requires. The mop head is made of microfiber strings that are more absorbent than they appear, and can really soak up large amounts of liquid in a single pass. The head’s triangular design makes it easy to get into corners and to clean around furniture legs. I found that the relatively short length of these strands also made it easy to spin and dry out the head, unlike the longer loops of the Libman Wonder Mop, which were messier and more challenging to control when soaking wet.

    Most importantly, the O-Cedar’s scrubbing capabilities were superior to the pad-based mops we tested. The mop head fared well in my bathroom tile tests, easily taking care of soap residue, soaking up cleaning liquid, and capturing loose dirt without just moving it around. The head cleaned up easily in the laundry using a regular wash and dry cycle too, and was ready for action again the following day. Plus, since the mop ships with three microfiber scrubbing heads, you’ll be able to tackle extra-large cleaning projects without needing to wait for a wash cycle to get finished.

    The only real drawback to this mop is the large bucket size. At 20 inches long it might be too bulky to store in a  bathroom closet, although this large size does make it practical for larger, whole-house mopping jobs.

    OXO-Good-Grips-spray-mop-best-mops

    While it wasn’t quite as effective in handling dirt as our top pick, the lightweight, hassle-free design of the multifunctional Oxo Good Grips Microfiber Spray Mop makes it a perfect choice for tackling quick cleanups and spills.

    The manual trigger was large enough to use comfortably, and also felt nice and sturdy when pumping away; we preferred it to battery-powered sprayers like the Swiffer WetJet Hardwood and Floor Spray Mop. At 2.4 pounds it was effortless to carry around the house and up and down the stairs with ease.

    Our favorite feature of this mop is the detachable mop pad. If you come upon a stubborn spot that it can’t remove, you can simply detach it with a simple latch, revealing a small scrubbing head. The small size of the scrubber allows you to really lean into it as you work, and the rougher texture took care of even the toughest sticky residue. Often, features like this feel like gimmicks — unreliable, ineffective or just out of place in the overall design of the product — but not in this case. The scrubber pad is both useful and honestly really fun to use. We found ourselves searching for spots and stains to use it on.

    The wet mopping pad was absorbent enough to work well on hardwood, and the spray trigger made it easy to control the precise amount of cleaner being dispersed. The pad didn’t do as good a job at capturing and removing the potting soil mess on the bathroom tile as the O-Cedar, however, and ended up spreading it around more than actually picking it up.

    Oxo-good-grips-best-mops-scrubber-detail

    The Oxo kit includes a great selection of accessories and attachments, especially considering the low price. You get three wet mopping pads, three scrubbing pads and two reusable bottles, and thanks to the hanging loop on top of the handle, it won’t need to take up any valuable floor space. The instruction manual even includes a pair of recipes for making your own cleaning solution.

    Bona-mop-best-mops

    If your priority is cleaning hardwood flooring, the Bona Hardwood Floor Premium Spray Mop is a great choice. It includes a 34-oz bottle of Bona hardwood floor cleaner — a product that we’ve used on hardwood flooring for years — which can easily be refilled with large Bona refill jugs. This bottle was really simple to pop in and out too.

    The manual trigger makes it easy to dispense a precise amount of cleaner, so we never had to worry about too much soaking the flooring. The mop was very comfortable to use, thanks to a soft foam grip on the handle, and the extra wide pad — 16.5 inches — let us cover a lot of area in a short time.

    This pad can be used to dry mop as well, so there’s no need to pull out a separate broom and dustpan to prep your floors. The kit only includes a single pad, however, so we suggest grabbing an extra to have on hand for large jobs.

    Large liquid spills and stuck-on grime, dirt and other residue on hard floors that sweeping and vacuuming just can’t handle call for a mop. By combining a liquid cleaner with a textured scrubbing head, mops can dislodge the spill or residue, as well as absorb and contain it, leaving you with a clean floor. It’s worth noting that for small spills, a cleaning spray and a rag or paper towels should suffice, but it’s not really practical to clean a whole room or even a large area that way.

    There are three basic types of mops to choose from: traditional “string mops” with a shaggy head that you wring out in a bucket, squeeze or spin out; spray mops that have a flat pad and use a built-in reservoir to spray cleaner onto the floor; and basic pad-and-handle designs that require you to apply floor cleaner from a separate container.

    String mops are good for larger cleaning jobs, since their buckets provide a large supply of cleaner, meaning you can clean large areas (there’s a reason you’ll see these used by professional cleaners). With longer handles designed to be used without bending over (many newer designs are even adjustable), they are much more comfortable to use than old-school options, and new materials like microfiber make the pads easier and faster to wring out than older string mop heads. The buckets themselves can still be bulky and heavy to move around though, so keep that in mind.

    Pad mops are just that: a pad, typically microfiber and either disposable or washable, connected to a handle. They typically don’t come with a bucket or cleaning reservoir. Some pad mops are meant to be used dry on hardwood surfaces, while others can be used with a cleaning solution, though you’ll need to apply that from a separate container. Some are available in very wide sizes, and can be effective and efficient for lighter cleaning in large rooms without a ton of obstacles.

    Spray mops are akin to pad mops, but have a built-in cleaner reservoir and applicator, are relatively low maintenance and typically provide everything you need to get mopping right away. Their pads don’t have as much surface area as string mops and thus aren’t able to absorb as much liquid, and you don’t have a way to easily wring them out when they get saturated, so they are better suited for smaller mopping jobs like tidying up a single room unless you have a supply of pads ready to switch out during big projects. Some spray mops, like the Swiffer WetJet Hardwood and Floor Spray Mop use disposable pads, which are convenient for those who don’t want to hassle with laundry, but are less eco-friendly than reusable pads.

    Mopping is an essential element of cleaning any home with hard floors, but it takes a little planning. First, make sure to clear the floor of dry debris like pet hair and dirt — whether you do that with a handheld vacuum or cordless vacuum or by sweeping, or dry mopping (some mops are designed for or include a separate pad specifically for dry mopping). If using a string mop, fill your bucket with your cleaning solution (choose one that is designed for your specific flooring type), dunk your mop head and then wring it out until it’s damp but not dripping wet. If it’s too wet, you can damage your floors and increase the drying time.

    Then, using a figure-eight pattern, work from one end of the room to the other, pushing the mop but walking backwards so you don’t tread on the newly damp floor. If you encounter stubborn spots, apply some extra downward pressure and go back and forth a few extra times. Once your mop becomes dirty — this will depend on the state of your floors to begin with — rinse your mop head in the bucket, wring it out, and continue mopping. For especially dirty floors, you may need to employ a second “rinsing” bucket (or use your sink) to keep your mop head clean enough to work effectively.

    You use a spray mop or flat pad mop in essentially the same way — working your way backwards — but instead of figure-eights, work in straight lines. When the pad becomes too dirty to clean effectively, either rinse it off in the sink and wring it out by hand or replace it with a fresh one.

    Although some flooring materials — namely hardwood and some engineered laminate materials — require a more delicate touch, most hard flooring should be safe to mop.

    Ceramic tiles and linoleum are sturdy and are typically sealed well enough to be mopped without incident, but floors with more seams, like hardwood and vinyl plank can be more vulnerable to excess moisture. For these floors, make sure to use only the least amount of liquid possible to get the job done, and never allow water or cleaning solution to sit or pool for any length of time.

    You should also make sure to use the proper cleaning solution for your specific type of flooring. You’ll find many cleaning solutions formulated for different surfaces, though a dish soap and water solution works well for many surfaces. You’ll want to stay away from any abrasive cleaners, keep oil soaps to wood floors and only use bleach-based cleaners on tile floors. If you’re not sure what to use, or whether or not your mop can be used on your flooring (especially if you’re dealing with materials like cork or bamboo), take the time to carefully review the manufacturer’s recommendations.

    If your floors are severely worn, cracked or buckled you might want to consult with a flooring professional about repairs before beginning a mopping routine.

    Regardless of the type and size of the mop, it should be easy and comfortable to use. We paid close attention to both how the mop felt in our hands, as well as how easy — or difficult — it was to use any of its components and accessories. We looked at everything from attaching pads and heads, removing filling, and inserting cleaning reservoirs to how well the head could pivot and rotate around obstacles.

    We noted if any assembly was required when unboxing each mop, and if so, how straightforward or complicated it was. We also reviewed the instruction and use manuals for each mop, making sure they clearly explained how to put their product together, and we looked at whether the mop, bucket, and accessories were easy to store when not in use.

    We checked on whether the mop itself and any accessories or attachments, like liquid containers, pads or buckets, were made of quality materials, and took note if any components were flimsy or felt like they could fail with frequent use.

    If the mop heads were machine washable — nearly all of them were — we ran them through a full wash and dry cycle according to their instructions. We noted how well they held up during washing, examining if they begin to unravel or fall apart, appear to lose their structural integrity or feel like they lost any of their absorbency or scrubbing texture.

    We assessed performance on the three types of flooring that most commonly require mopping in the average home.

    • Hardwood flooring: We used each mop to completely mop a large section of sealed hardwood flooring, paying close attention to how well it removed dirt as well as absorbed excess liquid. We noted how dry (or not dry) we were able to get the mop head, since too much liquid can easily damage hardwood flooring, especially older planks like mine. We also checked how the floors looked after drying, making note of any leftover swirls, streaks or cleaning residue.
    • Linoleum kitchen tiles: After pouring 1/4 cup of soda on linoleum kitchen tiles we allowed it dry for a bit, then used each mop to clean it up. This helped to see how effective each mop was when it came to moderate scrubbing, as well as how absorbent they were in terms of removing excess liquid.
    • Bathroom tile: To test each mop’s ability to clean up stubborn bathroom floor messes, we rubbed a bar of soap on hard bathroom tiles, then rubbed in a handful of potting soil, creating a truly challenging mess. Each mop was judged based on its ability to both scrub up the soap residue, absorb the cleaning liquid and capture and contain the dirt without just pushing it around the room.

    Oshang Flat Floor Mop and Bucket Set

    $65 $50 at Amazon

    The Oshang Flat Floor Mop’s distinctive bucket features two slots, one for dunking your mop head and the other, narrower slot for squeegeeing the dirty water off and drying the pad. You can run the mop head through the drying slot as many times as you like, depending on how much water you want to remove. This made it effective for both hardwood floor work and tasks that you want a bit more water for, like the soap residue on bathroom tiles (though the pads weren’t the most effective scrubbers we tested). It also includes two wet and two dry pads, so you’re set for larger tasks. The compact footprint of the bucket makes this a good option for those who don’t have a lot of storage space.

    Bosheng Mop and Bucket

    $50 $40 at Amazon

    The Bosheng’s slotted bucket design is great for getting your mop head dry without bending over, but it wasn’t as easy to use, durable or effective as the otherwise very similar Oshang Flat Floor Mop and Bucket Set, which we would recommend in its place unless you’re on a very tight budget.

    This mop features an extra-large head — 15 by 5 inches — and a nearly 60-inch handle, making it well-suited for covering large areas quickly and efficiently. The clamping mechanism that attaches the pad to the mop head was impressive as well, and allowed for attaching and removing the pad far more easily than other pad mops that used Velcro attachments. The thick, heavy-duty stainless steel handle made it easy to maneuver the mop around the floor, and the pads can be used to dry mop, so no need to break out the broom and dustpan. The main drawback of this mop was the connection between the handle and the mop head itself, which felt flimsy and unstable. This was a shame because the rest of the unit had a nice, sturdy feel to it. The large size of this mop head could also be inconvenient for those with tight or cluttered spaces.

    The Libman Wonder Mop’s substantial microfiber strips were both good at scrubbing and long enough to reach around furniture legs and into tight spaces (between the wheels of a mobile kitchen island, for instance), and the packages included three extra mop heads. But the microfiber strips that make up the head were long enough to wrap around furniture legs and the wheels of my kitchen island, and the mop head popped right off during use and required reattachment several times, so we’re unsure that it would stand up under regular use.

    The O-Cedar cloth mop is well-built, with a sturdy metal pole that threads right into the mop head, while still remaining extremely lightweight at just 1.3 pounds. The microfiber loops are absorbent, but more importantly, they made it possible to perform aggressive scrubbing on problem areas. This made it one of the standouts in our kitchen and bathroom tile testing, and the looped design was ideal for capturing and containing dirt and debris. It didn’t fare too well on hardwood flooring though, as it just didn’t have the surface area to efficiently cover larger rooms. If you prefer a simple looped mop head, and are willing to purchase the separate quick-wring bucket needed for wringing it out, this could be a great choice.

    There’s a lot to like about this electric mop, as well as a few things that kept it out of the top spot. First of all, it’s really well-made, and the entire unit felt sturdy and solid. It came nearly fully assembled, too; you just attach the top part of the handle to the base, and that’s it, you’re ready to go. The twin rotating pads Velcroed easily to the base, and when turned on, worked almost like a self-propelled lawnmower, requiring almost no effort to push forward. Unfortunately, even though this mop did fairly well in our testing, this rotating action did end up leaving some faint swirl patterns on hardwood and kitchen tile. These were fairly easy to remove with another mop, but that really defeats the purpose altogether. The automatic operation also means that you aren’t really able to add any extra pressure if you encounter stubborn spots, so it’s only suited for lighter-duty cleaning. At over $100, this is an expensive option but it did include a large, 80-ounce jug of multi-surface cleaner.

    This large head makes it perfect for cleaning a large room with minimal passes — it worked incredibly fast in our hardwood floor testing — but it is inconvenient to use in tighter spots, like in the bathroom. That said, it did perform well overall, and was absorbent enough to really soak up a decent amount of liquid. It did suffer the same problem as other large pad mops, like the Mr. Siga Professional Microfiber Mop, in that its large surface area made it difficult to apply direct pressure to stubborn grime and sticky residue. It’s really better for lighter work. Putting a foot on the mop head and pressing down does the trick, but that’s certainly not an ideal solution, and likely not great for overall longevity of the mop. It’s worth noting that this mop includes a dedicated dust mop head (no other mop we tested had such an accessory), which worked really well for clearing dust and pet hair.

    It’s hard to deny the convenience of the disposable pads of the Swiffer WetJet Hardwood Floor Spray Mop. Instead of having to deal with reusable pads that need to be laundered after every use, you simply use these until they get dirty and toss them in the trash. This may not be the most eco-friendly approach, however, and several third-party providers offer reusable pads. Just remember that the more you clean, the more pads and cleaning solution you’ll need to purchase, which can really add up if you have a lot of floor to mop. The pads included with this model were not as absorbent as we would like, and struggled in our bathroom tile tests — they felt too slippery to actually capture and pick up the soap residue and dirt. That said, the mop is solidly built, and the dual sprayers covered an impressive amount of flooring. The dispenser is battery-operated. which could be a nice perk for those who don’t want to continually squeeze a trigger every time.

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • Best Vacuums for pet hair in 2023 | CNN Underscored

    Best Vacuums for pet hair in 2023 | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    Cats and dogs bring joy, comfort and companionship to your household. But they also bring hair — lots of hair, on your clothing, on your furniture and all over the floor. As with children and mess, controlling cat and dog hair in the house is a running battle, one you signed up for when you brought those bundles of chaos into your house.

    A vacuum cleaner is a crucial tool against pet hair, dander and dust, especially for people with allergies, and many models now include specially designed floor heads and accessories for cleaning up after pets. We’ve found the best vacuums for pet hair among the seven cordless stick vacuums, 10 robot vacuums, six uprights and nine canister vacuums we’ve tested.

    The best robot vacuum for pet hair

    The budget-priced iLife V3S Pro uses a suction tube like a traditional vacuum cleaner rather than the roller brushes employed by other robot vacuums, and does a better job picking up pet hair without clogging.

    The best robot vacuum that can allegedly avoid dog poop

    The iRobot j7+ is the best robot vacuum you can buy right now, with simpler mapping, more cleaning power and smarter features (like dog poop avoidance) than anything else we tested.

    Best cordless stick vacuum for pet hair and deep carpet

    With impressive power and the ability to tackle cleaning tasks on surfaces ranging from high-pile carpet to hard floors, the Dyson V11 Animal is the most capable cordless stick vacuum we tested.

    Best upright vacuum for pet hair

    The Bissell Pet Hair Eraser Lift-Off Upright Vacuum’s standout feature is the Pet Turboeraser tool, which has a spinning brush head with bristles that easily pull dog and cat hair off upholstery and stairs, making it the best upright vacuum for pet owners.

    Best canister vacuum for pet hair and thick carpet

    The Kenmore BC4026 canister vacuum is great for large homes, deep-pile carpet and folks with allergies. It’s bulky and inelegant, but its powered floorhead outperforms vacuums twice its price, the motorized pet hair mini brush keeps upholstery looking fresh and its dust bags and exhaust filter are HEPA-compliant.

    Best handheld vacuum for pet hair

    With a motorized brush that picks up more pet hair than any other handheld vacuum we tested, the powerful Bissell Pet Hair Eraser lets you take care of pet messes on floors, upholstery, in the care, or anywhere it might accumulate.

    Underscored best robot vacuum  iLife V3S Pro

    Key Specs

    • Navigation style: bump and run
    • Capacity: 0.08 gallons (0.3 liters)
    • Run time: 90 minutes
    • Dimensions: 11.8 inches wide by 3 inches high

    Of the 10 robot vacuums we tested, the iLife V3S Pro was the best at removing pet hair without clogging, thanks to its lack of roller brushes. At around $160, it costs hundreds less than most robot vacuums.

    The iLife V3S Pro does a great job removing pet hair and cat litter from hardwood floor and low carpet. It uses bump-and-run navigation, rather than mapping, and it can’t avoid cords or poop like the Roomba j7+ can, but it’ll clean your whole space eventually. It can’t empty itself, unlike more expensive robots, and it doesn’t have a bin fill indicator. But if you make it a habit to empty the dust bin every day, it’ll drastically cut down on pet hair in your space for very little effort on your part.

    underscored_best tested products_robot vacuum_irobot roomba j7.jpeg

    Key Specs

    • Navigation style: mapping
    • Capacity: 0.07 gallons (0.25 liters) internal dustbin, 0.63 gallon (2.4L) external dustbag in base.
    • Run time: 100 minutes
    • Dimensions: 13.3 inches wide by 3.4 inches high

    If you have money to spare and want a robot vacuum that’s smarter than you are, consider the iRobot Roomba j7+. Unlike the iLife V3S Pro, it’s not bump-and-run: It maps your house, including no-go zones, and it has built-in object detection that helps it avoid power cords, headphones and — most importantly — pet waste, so you can hopefully avoid pooptastrophe.

    The j7+ is self-emptying, unlike the iLife V3S Pro, which needs to be emptied after each run, and its rubber multi-surface brushes were second only to the V3S Pro, which has no brushes at all, in avoiding pet hair tangles. The Dirt Detect feature lets it focus on specific messes, like a cat litter spill, and go back over the area until it’s clean.

    The Roomba j7+ is the best robot vacuum you can buy, but it’s expensive, and in our testing its self-empty cycle briefly made a noise like a jet engine. If you have the money, though, and especially if you have pets prone to pooping inside, it’s a compelling upgrade over the iLife V3S Pro.

    Dyson V11-head.jpg

    Key Specs

    • Weight: 6.68 pounds
    • Capacity: 0.2 gallon
    • Battery life: 30-45 minutes in Auto or Boost mode, up to 60 minutes in Eco mode.

    The Dyson V11 Animal is the best cordless stick vacuum for pet hair, and the best stick vacuum of the seven we tested. If you live in an apartment or smaller home, it might even be the only vacuum you need. Its swiveling floor head makes fast work of pet hair and dust even in high-pile carpets, and in handheld mode, the crevice tool and mini motorized brush tool are fantastic for cleaning upholstered furniture, cat towers and pet beds. It’s lightweight, maneuverable and cordless, so getting the vacuum out isn’t a hassle like it can be for upright and canister vacuums.

    The V11 Animal’s biggest weakness is battery life. At its automatic and Boost settings, it gets 30 to 45 minutes of runtime, which might not be enough. Unlike other stick vacuums with swappable batteries, the Dyson’s rechargeable battery is built in, so once it’s out of juice, you have to wait for it to recharge. The Dyson also uses a trigger-style power switch, which you have to hold down the entire time you’re vacuuming — it’s fine for smaller tasks, but you might find it taxing if you’re cleaning an entire apartment.

    BISSELL Lift off.jpg

    Key Specs

    • Weight: 17.75 pounds
    • Capacity: 0.26 gallon (1 liter)
    • Cord length: 30 feet
    • Hose length: 8 feet

    If you have a home too large to vacuum in a single charge of a stick vacuum, especially one with lots of carpet, you should consider a corded upright vacuum. While larger, heavier and less maneuverable than cordless stick vacuums, they have higher suction, and won’t run out of charge.

    The Bissell Pet Hair Eraser Lift-Off Upright is the best upright vacuum for pet hair, thanks to its Pet Turboeraser mini brush tool, which does a better job removing pet hair from stairs and upholstery than the five other uprights we tested (though it’s powered by suction, rather than motorized, so it won’t be as effective as a motorized pet hair tool like the one on the Kenmore BC4026 canister vacuum, below).

    The Pet Hair Eraser’s lift-off feature means the canister, hose, wand and motor detach from the floor head, so you can easily use it to vacuum upholstery, drapes, fixtures and other things above floor level. At 18 pounds, the vacuum isn’t the lightest of the six upright vacuums we tested, and it’s not the best on hard floors, but it’s the best upright option for people with pets. However, people with dust or dander sensitivities should consider a bagged canister vacuum rather than a bagless upright like the Bissell.

    Underscored Kenmore Pop-N-Go best canister vacuum

    Key Specs

    • Weight: 22 pounds
    • Dustbag capacity: 0.8 gallon (3 liters)
    • Cord length: 28 feet
    • Hose length: 6.5 feet, including handle
    • Wand length: 22-33 inches

    For folks with pets, carpets and dust or dander sensitivities, a canister vacuum can offer even more powerful suction, deeper carpet cleaning and better air filtration than an upright. The Kenmore BC4026 Pet-Friendly Pop-N-Go isn’t particularly maneuverable, even by canister vacuum standards, but its electric floor sweeper brush pulls an unbelievable amount of dust and pet hair from the thickest of carpets. Like the Bissell Pet Hair Eraser upright, it has a mini turbo brush (here called a Pet Powermate) that makes quick work of cat hair on cat trees, microfiber upholstery and pet beds. Unlike the Bissell, Kenmore’s version is motorized, so you can change the suction level without changing the brush speed, which really helps get pet hair off of upholstery without inhaling the fabric.

    Both the dust bag and exhaust filter of the BC4026 are HEPA-compliant, and offer much better air filtration and dust containment than a bagless vacuum, as well as three times the dust capacity of the Dyson V11 Animal stick vacuum or Bissell Pet Hair Eraser Lift-Off Upright. But that’s at the cost of portability and maneuverability; at 22 pounds, the Kenmore is 4 pounds more than the Bissell upright, and neither its floor head nor canister are as nimble. But for sheer power, you can’t beat a canister vac, and the Kenmore is far more affordable than the much more maneuverable Miele Complete C3 Kona.

    Bissel Pet Hair Eraser

    The Bissell Pet Hair Eraser is the best handheld vacuum for pet hair — it has a motorized brush that lets it pick up pet hair from upholstery, floors, in the car and everywhere else we found the stuff (which, as you know if you’re a cat or dog parent, is pretty much everyplace). Even though the Pet Hair Eraser is on the larger side (thanks to its sizable canister) at 17 inches long and weighs around 3 pounds, it’s still well balanced and comfortable to use.

    The motorized pet hair brush attaches securely and let us get at dog hair embedded deep in carpeting, rugs, and couches, and even in our test vehicle’s carpeting. The 23.6 ounce canister—the largest of all the handheld vacuums we tested—sucked up a large amount of hair before needing to be emptied, and along with the 17-minute runtime let us work until the job was truly complete, and the long crevice tool and flat upholstery brush let us get into nooks and crannies where the motorized main brush couldn’t go.

    The Bissell Pet Hair Eraser is versatile enough that you could use it as your only handheld vacuum. whether you’re looking for something to use around the house or to keep your car clean, though it’s extra power and capacity makes it a bit bulkier and a bit more cumbersome to handle than some of its competitors. You might look elsewhere if you are looking to pick up after kids, as the nozzle was too narrow to suck up Cheerios. It also doesn’t have a charging base, but comes with a wall-wart power supply cable — a less convenient setup than our other favorite handheld vacuums.

    robot-vacuum-test-group.jpg

    The bristles on a vacuum’s brush head are designed to agitate carpet and to lift dust, debris and hair from the floor. As anyone who’s used a hairbrush knows, though, over time hairs get caught in the bristles. If you have pets that shed a lot, the hair can accumulate so fast on the brush that it clogs the vacuum, lowering suction or preventing the brush from turning at all. That’s why many companies sell vacuums optimized for pet hair, with brushes designed not to clog on hair, along with powered mini brush head attachments to get pet hair off of upholstery and stairs.

    Pet-specific vacuums often include HEPA filters, aimed at controlling dust, dander and pet-related allergens in general. If you’re concerned about such issues, you may want to seek out a bagged vacuum rather than a bagless model; the bag provides an extra filtration stage and also lets you avoid dust spillage when emptying.

    If you have a houseful of cats and dogs, a canister vacuum or upright vacuum will give you the power and tools to deal with animal hair, dander and dust on any surface. These corded units have more-powerful motors and stronger suction and pet-friendly models offer powered brushes designed to make short work of hair without clogging. While they may be a little more ungainly than cordless sticks, they won’t run out of power midway through your weekly cleaning.

    An apartment or small house can likely get by with a cordless stick vacuum, especially if you have mostly bare floors. If you have a large house or lots of carpet, an upright or canister vacuum is a better choice; they can provide more suction than cordless stick vacuum, and won’t run out of batteries in the middle of a job. Many of these also double as handheld vacuums, which are great for keeping upholstery hair-free or for tackling small pet-associated messes.

    A robot vacuum probably shouldn’t be your only vacuum if you’re trying to clean up after pets, but it’s a great complement to a cordless stick, upright or canister vacuum. Running a robot vacuum daily can keep the day-to-day buildup of fuzz to a manageable minimum so your weekly chores are less of a chore. The small roller brushes on most robot vacuums can clog quickly with pet hair, however, so you’ll want to pay attention to regular maintenance. Our current favorite in the category, the iLife V3S Pro, avoids this nagging issue by not using a roller brush at all.

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • The best products we tested in March 2023: Flashlights, photo printers and more | CNN Underscored

    The best products we tested in March 2023: Flashlights, photo printers and more | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    CNN Underscored is constantly testing products — be those flashlights, photo printers or food dehydrators — to find the absolute best in each respective category. Our testing process is rigorous, starting out by spending hours of research to find the top products in each category. Once we create a testing pool of products, we test and retest each product multiple times in real-world settings over several weeks or even months.

    This year, we’ve already tested several hundred products — from PS5 games to smartphone apps to wireless speakers — to find the best products you need to make life better. Here are the winning products from March.

    Wireless earbuds with incredible battery life and comfort

    If you’re looking to spend less than $100 on a pair of noise-canceling earbuds — and want something stylish and low-profile — it’s hard to do much better than the Jabra Elite 4.

    An impressible and uniquely stylish set of wireless earbuds

    If you’re looking to spend less than $150 on a quality set of noise-canceling earbuds — and want something that stands out from the pack — the Nothing Ear (2) are worth it.

    A good audiophile option

    If you’re willing to splurge on a stylish pair of headphones with true audiophile-grade sound (and can live without features like active noise cancellation), the Master & Dynamic MH40 are worth the investment.

    An excellent small wireless speaker

    The Era 100 produces a bigger sound than the Sonos One without increasing the size much and delivers impressive bass for a small speaker. It adds Bluetooth and the option for external sources through a line-in adapter. But the price has gone up again.

    Room-filling sound from one speaker

    The Era 300 makes it easy to bask in immersive spatial audio — with its wide sound, it feels like you’re listening to more than one speaker. Thanks to crisp treble and deep bass, it sounds good with regular stereo music, too. It’s packed with features, but you pay a premium for the privilege.

    Best drip coffee maker overall

    The Braun KF6050WH BrewSense Drip Coffee Maker produced consistently delicious, hot cups of coffee, brewed efficiently and cleanly, from sleek, relatively compact hardware that is turnkey to operate, and all for a reasonable price.

    Unique outdoor rowing experience with a clean, intuitive interface

    The Hydrow Rower is a sleek, premium rowing machine that pairs with a $44-per-month All-Access membership. Yes, it offers a kicking cardio and full-body workout, but we loved how it takes rowing back to its roots with live classes filmed at real-world locales. It may be pricey, but if you want to feel like you’re rowing on the water, then this home gym rowing machine is for you.

    The perfect treadmill for running in smaller spaces

    If you’ve always wanted a treadmill but didn’t have the space or the cash for a larger machine, the ProForm Carbon T7 is a perfect compromise. No, it doesn’t have the horsepower of larger, pricier treadmills, but you do get a wealth of advanced AI features as well as access to different types of classes with the iFit subscription (which is free for three years). And a smaller footprint paired with a budget price is nothing to sneeze at when you’re thinking about adding to your home gym.

    A cult classic trail runner with even better traction

    Fans of the Lone Peak series will love the new 7s for their wide width and upgraded grip, while newcomers to this shoe might be surprised at its lack of cushioning and zero-drop design. Either way, Altra has managed to deliver yet another awesome trail sneaker, with slip-proof laces and just the right amount of breathable mesh.

    A close-to-perfect bottle with a few shortcomings

    It isn’t perfect, but the collapsible HydraPak Flux+ 1.5L bottle has an incredible flow rate and a durable exterior, making it a top dog in the market of bottles with built-in filters. Difficulty keeping it clean, particularly in the long term, holds it back from being a perfect option.

    The definitive version of a survival horror masterpiece

    Resident Evil 4 is an outstanding retelling of the 2005 original single player story for modern audiences. Everything from the upgraded combat and mobility to the striking audio and visuals go a long way in making this the definitive take on Resident Evil 4.

    Best food dehydrator overall

    With hassle-free operation and consistent drying, the Nesco Gardenmaster offered the best balance of simplicity and performance of any food dehydrator we tested, and is a great choice for anyone looking to preserve herbs, fruits and vegetables or meats.

    A plush bed in a box that’s great for side or back sleepers who appreciate softness

    Leesa’s Legend Mattress is an excellent mattress for side sleepers, with soft support to alleviate pressure and back pain and a breathable top cover and ventilated foam layer to keep you cool.

    A useful sleep aid that focuses on calm breathing

    The Dodow sleep aid is a unique and useful device. It helped us fall asleep faster, and more consistently. It isn’t hard to learn to sync your breath with the light, and once you get used to the process, you’ll feel the results. Just breathe in when it expands and out when it contracts.

    An attractive, multitasking bedside assistant

    The Hatch Restore 2 is an all-encompassing sleep machine that uses light and sound to help you fall asleep faster and stay asleep longer. The accompanying app gives you access to a library full of colored lights, white noise, sleep stories and guided meditation. But where the Restore 2 really shines is its amazingly pleasant Sunrise Alarm, which wakes you gently and more humanely than the average alarm clock.

    A convenient, app-based countertop oven for busy cooks

    The Tovala Smart Oven Air Fryer offers a simple, fresh meal delivery service for one and Wi-Fi connected, one-touch cooking. A great budget toaster oven if you order meals, it jumps to a pricier, less useful purchase if you’re more interested in cooking from scratch. However, if you’re looking to save time and energy, then this countertop oven beats out supermarket frozen food and takeout.

    Best meal planning app overall

    During testing, we found Eat This Much Premium easy to set up. Its meal customization options and editable grocery lists are a delight to use and we appreciated its comprehensive recipe library. It also had the best online help and customer support of the meal planning apps we tested.

    Best plant identification app for mobile overall

    During testing, we found PlantNet easy to use, accurate and fast. This free app guides you during setup, lets you search by map or flora, and suggests you enable geolocation (GPS) to improve its plant identification.

    The ideal travel backpack if you want to pack for several days away without checking a bag

    The Incase A.R.C. Travel Pack is equal parts backpack and suitcase. Its butterfly-style packing system lets you maximize space for packing clothes and other essentials, while it has a separate laptop compartment and plenty of additional pockets. While it’s on the pricey side, its durable exterior and versatility make this a solid addition to your travel wardrobe.

    Best checked suitcase overall

    With fantastic internal organization and compression, a durable exterior and comfortable handles, the Away Medium suitcase was the most well-rounded bag we tested, with a great combination of maneuverability, capacity, durability and style.

    Best robot mop overall

    The compact, inexpensive iRobot Braava Jet 240 is simply the best robot mop for the money. While it doesn’t have the smarts of more expensive models and can’t do double duty as a vacuum, its efficient design and simple pattern-based navigation deliver impressive cleaning.

    Best robot vacuum overall

    The iRobot Roomba j7+ is the best robot vacuum you can buy right now, with impressive cleaning power and smart mapping that creates virtual boundaries to detect and avoid obstacles.

    Best office chair overall

    The Steelcase Series 1 stood out as one of the most customizable, high-quality, comfortable office chairs on the market, beating out chairs double the price — making it the best bang for the buck.

    The perfect sub-$400 monitor for your home office

    The LG UltraFine 4K is a great sub-$400 monitor for anyone looking to upgrade their home office, offering great 4K picture quality and plenty of ports.

    Best photo printer overall

    In our tests, the Pro 200 turned out prints comparable in quality much more expensive models, and running costs are relatively low. Straightforward setup and impressive results made it the best value among the photo printers we tested.

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • The best air mattress in 2023 | CNN Underscored

    The best air mattress in 2023 | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    This article is a part of CNN Underscored’s Guide to Sleep, a week-long focus on everything you need to sleep better. We’ll be featuring new products and exclusive deals all week, so check in every morning to see what’s new.

    You may not use an air mattress often, but when the time comes, you’ll want one that’s reliable, comfortable, and easy to inflate and store. You don’t want to struggle to set it up, you need it to be supportive enough to provide a good night’s rest and the last thing you or your guests want is to wake up in the middle of the night, floundering in a half-deflated blob of vinyl.

    We set out to find the best air mattress, putting seven top models to the test, judging them on their comfort while sleeping, as well as their overall usability when it comes to setting up, inflating, deflating, and storage. If you haven’t shopped for an air mattress in a while, you’ll be surprised to find how comfortable and convenient they are nowadays, but even among this impressive group we found an outstanding choice that should make you and your guests happy.

    The Best Air Mattress Overall

    In addition to providing the most comfortable night’s sleep during testing, the King Koil Luxury Air Mattress uses a built-in pump for quick and convenient inflation, and features a raised pillow that helps mimic the feel of a real bed.

    King Koil luxury underscored best air mattress

    While many of the air mattresses I tested were similar in design, pump operation, and dimensions, the King Koil Luxury Air Mattress was a clear winner when it came to overall comfort. Not only does it feature a soft, velvety flocking covering the top, it’s designed with a raised pillow area on one end. This area provides just enough head and neck support to mimic the effect of a headboard, making it feel much more like a real bed to me than any other option.

    The King Koil Luxury Air Mattress provided a comfortable amount of full-body support as well. I’ll admit, the “coil-beam construction” sounded a bit gimmick-y, but these internal, air-filled coils seemed to work as advertised. They really provided the ideal amount of support for me, mimicking a real mattress more convincingly than the other mattresses we tested. Since these coils are spaced throughout the mattress, edge to edge, I never felt like the sides were going to give way and cause me to roll out, which is sometimes the case in less-supportive mattresses. I did experience a small amount of deflation over my 48 hours of testing, but it was minimal enough to chalk up to standard stretching of the new material. In fact, in addition to the two nights of sleeping, I also found myself laying down on it throughout the day, just to experience the comfort and support.

    At 20 inches high, the King Koil Luxury Air Mattress is convenient to climb into at night, and more importantly, comfortable to roll out of in the morning. Air mattresses that are lower to the ground were just more difficult to get into and out off, and the process involved more grunting and bending than we were prepared to do first thing in the morning. This was definitely not the case with the King Koil.

    Image of the side of a King Koil air mattress, showing the built-in pump mechanism

    The pump was both easy to use and quick to fill, fully inflating the mattress in just 1 minute 50 seconds. You simply twist the valve you want to use—either inflate or deflate—press the power switch and you’re all set. The power cord also conveniently stores inside a little storage cubby with a latching door, keeping everything nice and tidy when it’s time to store the mattress away.

    As for storage, despite its luxurious height and internal structure the King Koil packs up very tidily into a storage sack small enough to tuck into the back of a closet. Some competitors were stiff and difficult to fold up easily, and others were too large even folded away into their stuff sacks to store away easily.

    A King Koil air mattress folded down to its storage size.

    The materials used in the mattress and pump appear to be of high quality, and I never felt like any elements or components were flimsy, loose, or weak. Deflation was a breeze as well, taking just 1 minute 50 seconds to go from full to completely empty. It took me less than a minute to fold it up and slide it back into the included storage bag too, thanks to the illustrated instructions in the manual.

    A packed King Koil air mattress in its storage bag, sitting on a living room floor, watched over by a small brown and white dog seated on a couch.

    The King Koil Luxury Air Mattress is not cheap relative to the competition, but the overall comfort, build quality and speedy inflation makes it worth the money.

    How do you take care of an air mattress?

    Even high-quality air mattresses won’t last forever, but there are things you can do to extend their lifespan. Make sure to not only avoid punctures by keeping your pets off the bed—even small dogs can have sharp toenails that can puncture or scratch through an air mattress—but also avoid unnecessary pressure by preventing rambunctious kids from jumping or walking on it. This extra pressure can place more stress on the seams, causing splits and cracks over time. Insta-bed also advises you to avoid placing the mattress against the wall, to avoid hidden carpet tacks.

    You should also take the time to vacuum your mattress after every use. Accumulated crumbs and other small debris can also pose a potential puncture threat, especially when you’re folding it up and squeezing it down during deflation.

    The most important thing to remember is that cold temperatures can make vinyl stiffen, so if it’s being stored in a cool area, like a basement or attic, make sure to allow your air mattress to come to room temperature before inflating. If not, the vinyl may lack the flexibility it needs to expand safely, which can cause cracks or splits in the material. The Insta-bed manual also recommends this warming up period after your bed is delivered to your doorstep, since it could have been sitting outside for longer than you think.

    If your bed does get damaged, it’s not a lost cause. Every mattress I tested included a patch kit for leaks, which, if applied properly, can easily fix the problem. And should your built-in pump go haywire, some mattresses allow you to still fill them manually with a separate pump.

    Yes, you can take an air mattress camping. If you’d prefer to sleep well off the ground and not have to worry about roots and uneven ground impairing your sleep, they could be a great choice. However, you’ll need to be aware of their limitations and the effects they may have on your trip.

    First, since air mattresses are extremely vulnerable to punctures, you won’t want to lay it directly on the ground, and take care to keep it clear of stray campfire embers that could melt the vinyl. While patching holes is a solution, it’s not really a project that’s ideal to perform out in the wilderness. Keep in mind that you can just as easily puncture your mattress when it’s folded up, so don’t pack it with sharp objects. Air mattresses are also relatively heavy, and depending on how long you plan on carrying them to your site, this weight can be more trouble than it’s worth.

    Perhaps most importantly, you’ll need to make sure you have a reliable way to inflate your air mattress. If you want to take advantage of the convenience and quick performance of built-in pumps, you’ll need to have a power source, like a car cigarette lighter, or a campsite power hookup. If you’ll be away from electricity, you’ll need to go with a mattress that comes with a battery-powered pump, like the Intex Dura-Beam Standard Single-High Air Mattress, or a mattress with a manual foot pump. If these limitations sound like they won’t work with you and your trip, you’ll probably be better off with a camping pad.

    To help better understand the benefits and drawbacks of the air mattresses we tested, we ran each mattress through a comprehensive battery of real world tests, from setup to packing and unpacking and, of course, sleeping, evaluating them across a range of criteria but focusing on comfort and convenience.

    Since air mattresses are frequently set up in areas not typically used for a bed, and sometimes last-minute, it’s really important that they’re easy to use. Nobody wants to fumble around with a confusing air pump or have to go digging for an instruction manual when you just want to get to sleep. I paid close attention to how simple—or complicated—each mattress was to operate, from unboxing, to setup, inflation, deflation, and finally storage. Specifically, I noted any specific issues with the pump operation controls, and the helpfulness of each mattresses instruction manual.

    To accurately judge each mattress on the most important measure performance — it’s comfort and support while sleeping, I slept on each model for two nights, noting both how comfortable their soft topper was, as well as overall stability. I also paid close attention to any deflation issues overnight. Although minor deflation is expected with new air mattresses—the vinyl material stretches—I did my best to notice any significant deflation that could indicate actual issues down the road. I compared each mattresses pump as well, evaluating them on how easy they were to setup, notable noise differences, and how long it took them to fully inflate the mattress.

    After testing each mattress, I then deflated, rolled (or folded) up each mattress and stored it and any pumps in their included storage bag. I noted how easy this process was from start to finish, paying attention to how well the pump deflated the mattress, if there were any included instructions that made it easier to fold up the mattress correctly, and how easy it was to fit into the storage bag.

    During all of this testing, I kept track of any issues that caught my eye when it came to build quality. Flimsy switches or valve openings, and any noticeable seam or molding issues with the vinyl or soft topper all helped me evaluate one mattress vs another.

    In addition to these testing categories, I also compared specific metrics like overall weight, the dimensions of each mattress when folded up, and warranty lengths.

    A solid runner-up, the SoundAsleep mattress gave us a comfortable, supportive night’s sleep, and was a breeze to setup and inflate. Once you unfold it, you simply plug in the power cord and turn the control dial to “inflate” and you’re all set. That’s it. The velvet topper was nice and cozy, and I could definitely tell that it had some kind of structural support inside that helped keep it’s shape. Although I did experience some deflation after two nights of sleeping, it didn’t appear to be leak-related and could be chalked up to some standard stretching of the material. The only real drawback I had was a minor design issue with the power cord storage. Unlike other mattresses that provide a small latched door to keep the folded cord inside, this mattress only provides an open hole that you just kind of cram the cord into. It’s also worth noting that this model doesn’t include instructions for folding/rolling up the mattress for storage. This was a fairly straightforward process, so certainly isn’t a dealbreaker, but a diagram could certainly come in handy if you don’t remember how it was folded when you unboxed it. This mattress is also just 18 inches high, as opposed to the 20 inches of the King Koil, which was the primary reason it didn’t take my top spot.

    If you’re extra-sensitive to changes in air mattress inflation and prefer a specific level of firmness, this is the bed for you. The “never flat” pump will automatically power on if it detects that the bed is beginning to deflate, even a small amount, pumping it back up to your desired setting. You can choose between 3 of these settings—plush, medium, and firm—and the pump will maintain that setting at all times. If you’re worried about the noise of the pump interrupting your sleep, you shouldn’t be. I’m a fairly light sleeper and never woke up once during either night, despite the mattress remaining perfectly full the entire time. I kept the mattress next to my desk during the day to monitor the pump, and when it would power on for a few moments, I was really surprised at the low noise level. The supportive structure and velvet topper was comfortable as well, making this a favorite during testing. Keep in mind that you do have to keep it plugged in at all times to take advantage of the never-flat feature, which might limit where you can place it in your room. Plus, unlike the King Koil that covers the sides of the mattress with a soft black velvet, this model has exposed vinyl all around,giving it more of an “air mattress” feel, as opposed to the King Koil, which felt more like a real bed — but this is still a very comfortable air mattress.

    If a speedy inflation time is your priority, consider this high-quality EnerPlex mattress and its built-in pump. It took just 1 minute and 21 seconds to fully inflate, which was the fastest of all the mattresses we tested. The pump itself was simple to use: you just plug it in, rotate the inflation valve to open it, and press the power button. This mattress also scored major points in overall comfort during my sleep test, and its “coil beam construction” definitely provided a good amount of support throughout the night. I also appreciated the non-skid bottom too, which kept it firmly in place when getting in and out. Its 2-year warranty is twice as long as any other mattress I tested, making it well-suited for those who plan on using it frequently. Unfortunately, its 18-inch height was noticeably less comfortable to get in and out of than the 20-inch King Koil. That being said, if the King Koil is unavailable, this mattress is a great alternative.

    Intex Dura-Beam Standard Single-High Air Mattress

    The ultra-low price and compact size of this Intex mattress makes it a great choice for campers or those who are on an extra-tight budget. I was surprised at how comfortable this model felt during the night too, and the inner support system provided more structure than I expected at this price point. That said, its 10-inch height was definitely more of a challenge to get in and out of than the taller options I tested. Although the battery-powered pump took the longest to inflate—4 minutes—it was by far the quietest among the group we tested, which might be worthwhile if noise is a concern (apartment dwellers take note). I do wish the intake valve fit the pump a bit better, as I had to continually press the valve adapter into the port the entire time it was operating. Another drawback: Intex doesn’t include the six “C” batteries required for the Dura-Beam’s pump. I had to purchase these separately, so keep that in mind if you don’t already have them on hand.

    I really enjoyed the subtle “bumpers” on the edge of this mattress, which created a cozy, secure sleeping surface, and gave me the confidence that I wouldn’t accidentally roll out in the event of overnight deflation. At 22 inches, it was also the tallest of the models I tested, which made it really easy to get out of in the morning. The internal horizontal support beams gave it a nice and sturdy feel, and provided a really comfortable sleep overall. The pump was simple to use too, with just a simple dial to rotate from side to side. The main drawback to the this mattress was its inflation time. It took the longest to fill up, 4 minutes and 10 seconds, so keep that in mind if speedy inflation is a priority. At 21 pounds it’s also the heaviest of my testing pool, though not by much.

    The Coleman GuestRest mattress, unlike most of the competition in this price range, uses an external pump, which I found much less convenient than the built-in units. While the ability to use the pump for other items could be useful to some—like if you have pool toys, inflatable kayaks, or balloons—it was extremely loud by comparison, ultimately reaching a pitch that I would describe as “screaming”, and its ill-fitting adapter required you to hold it tightly in place during the inflation process. If you anticipate having to fill up your mattress late at night, this is not the mattress for you. I did appreciate that the pump and inflation instructions were both included in the instruction manual, as well as printed on the side of the mattress itself, which would be convenient if you lose the manual. In the pump’s defense, it did fill the mattress relatively quickly, taking just 3 minutes and 37 seconds to get a nice firm mattress. It’s also nice and compact, making it convenient to store when not in use.

    [ad_2]

    Source link

  • The best electric scooters in 2023 | CNN Underscored

    The best electric scooters in 2023 | CNN Underscored

    [ad_1]

    While the scooter rental business has cooled off, electric scooters are here to stay. Increasingly popular as personal transportation, these micromobility machines with electric motors and straightforward controls are a great solution for last-mile transportation (getting home from the train or bus, for instance). They’re nimble enough to transport you quickly, and you won’t break a sweat while riding to work. And since they’re much smaller and lighter than most bikes, they’re easy to carry up stairs, stow under a desk or hide away in a closet.

    We checked out seven popular models — and spent some time riding a Lime rental scooter — determining their range, speed and overall feel and ease of use over a variety of terrains and surfaces, and getting a sense of how we could integrate them into our daily routine. After all that, we found a couple of great scooters that can improve your commute, no matter what your budget.

    The best electric scooter overall

    The Segway Ninebot Max strikes the best balance between power, range and compactness of any electric scooter we tested. It’s simple to learn and use, and the powerful motor and comfortable ride easily tackled every route. 

    The best budget electric scooter

    At around half the price of our top pick, this Segway scooter has less power and range, but doesn’t compromise on build or ride quality and offers the same straightforward, easy-to-use controls as the rest of the Ninebot lineup.

    Striking a better balance between power, range and compact size than any other scooter we tested, the Segway Ninebot Max was our favorite electric scooter overall. Riding the Segway Ninebot Max is about as easy as it gets, and we were ready to hit the streets after about a minute of experimenting. The thumb throttle is responsive but not too jerky, and the mechanical handbrake allows for confident, gradual control of your speed, as well as more-sudden stops if needed. The display — a vertical screen in the center of the handlebars — clearly shows the current speed, speed setting and battery level. A single button is used to power on the unit, toggle through the three speed settings and activate the LED headlight. It’s as easy as they come.

    The 350W of power supplied by the motor allowed me to easily hit speeds of up to 20 MPH on the flats, and really impressed me with how well it handled the incline portions of my testing route. Unlike similar scooters that struggled with hills, the Segway Ninebot Max seemed to relish the challenge, and was able to maintain a solid 14 MPH on the steepest grade we climbed during testing, second only to the much larger Apollo City Pro. Thanks to the impressive battery capacity, this scooter also seemed to have a never-ending range, making it 21.4 miles before finally depleting its battery. The overall ride itself was smooth and comfortable too, and the 10-inch tires (it ships with traditional tires that use inner tubes) handled small bumps and cracks without too much discomfort to the rider. Some of the competition ships with solid rubber tires, which aren’t really suited to riding any distance.

    The Segway mobile app was reliable in our testing, while the apps from other brands felt like they were still working the bugs out. The app provides a battery percentage level — very convenient when charging — and provides a map of your entire route, using shades from light green to dark red to indicate your speed in different areas. Plus, you can lock the scooter with the touch of a button. (This “lock” simply prevents it from accelerating and sounds a constant beep if anyone tries to push it away. Not exactly 100% effective, but could definitely discourage a would-be thief walking by.)

    Just like the other Segway Ninebot scooters in our testing, the Ninebot Max had impressive build quality and intentional, well-thought-out overall design. It’s clear that Segway has been doing this a long time, unlike other scooter brands that felt like they were still working out design and functionality issues.

    The only real drawback to the Segway Ninebot Max (aside from the price, and assuming it is within your budget) is its weight. At 41.2 pounds, it’s not the easiest to carry around, but it’s important to remember that this extra battery weight is what allows for its long range, and that’s always going to be a trade-off. If you want a comfortable ride and don’t want to constantly worry about your battery level, this could be the perfect option.

    Underscored best electric scooters Segway Ninebot F30

    The scaled-down sibling of the Segway Ninebot Max, the Segway Ninebot F30 features the same high-quality construction and straightforward controls of our top pick — though with a bit less power and range — at a much lower price. Plus, you still get all the perks that come with the Segway mobile app, like route maps, Bluetooth locking capability and real-time battery level percentage.

    The biggest difference between the F30 and the Max, other than the much lower price, is its range. I was only able to hit 9.3 miles on the Segway Ninebot F30 before the battery died, which was on the lower end of my testing pool. This limited battery range does allow the F30 to weigh about 8 pounds less than the Max, and at 33 pounds total, it’s relatively easy to carry around after folding. The smaller battery pack also makes the F30 sleeker and more compact, without the extra bulk of longer-range scooters. If you don’t have a lengthy commute or really need to cover more distance, it may be worth stepping down to the F30.

    Despite the limited range, the F30 was still able to generate speeds of up to 16 MPH, although it struggled a bit on my hill test, topping out at 11 MPH. The controls are essentially the same as the Max, with a thumb accelerator throttle and mechanical hand brake, although the F30 uses a traditional bicycle bell that does add a little clutter to the handlebar area. The 10-inch pneumatic tires provide a much smoother ride than the solid tires of the similarly priced Unagi Model One or Swagger 5 Boost. Charging was a breeze as well, and it only took 4 hours to bring the battery level from 0 to 100%. Thanks to the 2.5W LED headlight and brake lights, you won’t feel like you’re compromising on safety features either.

    If range isn’t as much of a priority, and you’re working with a limited budget and the Ninebot Max is beyond your means, you really can’t go wrong with the F30.

    An electric scooter folds into a compact, easy-to-carry package that takes up less room than even most small folding bicycles, making it a good option for commutes that also involve public transportation. And they're easy to store at your destination.

    Electric scooters can be an efficient and convenient mode of transportation, but only if they work for you and with your lifestyle. Take the time to really think about your travel and commute needs and how you’ll be using it, and you’ll be able to figure out whether a scooter is for you.

    Electric scooters really shine in “last mile” applications, filling in part of a commute that isn’t covered by other transportation. They can eliminate time spent walking to the bus stop or train station, waiting around for the next scheduled service or driving around looking for a parking spot in your car. They’re ideal for supplementing other forms of transportation.

    Of course, if you live close enough to where you work or shop, a scooter can take you directly from your front door to your job or errand. An electric scooter can also be a practical choice for those who might otherwise ride a bicycle, but don’t want to arrive at work sweaty and out of breath, and are put off by the expense of an electric bike (or have nowhere to store one). They’re also useful for short errands that don’t involve too much cargo (since scooters can’t take racks or panniers like bikes). In those cases, though they’re not exactly cheap, electric scooters can easily pay for themselves if they let you avoid spending money on bus or train fare, or fuel and parking costs for your car.

    One thing to keep in mind is that scooters with bigger motors and bigger batteries may be able to take you further, but they’re much bulkier and can weigh quite a lot — the heavier models we looked at weigh nearly 50 pounds, making them tough to wrestle onto a bus or train and inconvenient to store. That extra power, then, can mean diminishing returns, since the additional oomph means they weigh nearly as much as an e-bike, which will typically have far more range, versatility and carrying capacity.

    Consider your local climate as well. If you live in a particularly wet or cold part of the country, it might be worth the extra cost or time to stay dry and warm inside a bus, train car or personal vehicle. Even if you’re open to braving the elements, try and choose one with a higher IP rating. This number will indicate how resistant your scooter is to moisture. For example, the IPX4 rating for the Unagi Model One means that it is “resistant to splashes in any direction”, while the sturdier Apollo City Pro gets an IPX6 rating, meaning it “can resist high-pressure, heavy sprays of water.” None of the scooters we looked at were rated for immersion, so you’ll want to take care.

    The most important feature to consider when choosing an electric scooter is probably range. Your scooter won’t be much use if it doesn’t have the battery capacity to get you where you need to go (and back home if you’re not going to be charging it in the meantime). This gets a little tricky because the actual range is going to be different depending on rider weight, any inclines or hills on your route, your speed and even the outside temperature. It’s important to know that the advertised range from the manufacturer is based on ideal conditions (low rider weight, perfectly flat and smooth ground, low speed, etc.), so I’d recommend cutting the stated range in half to get a more accurate number.

    I’d also recommend only purchasing a scooter that complies with UL (formerly known as Underwriters Laboratories) standards. The lithium-ion batteries inside electric scooters can catch fire and explode while charging, and a UL certification will ensure that you’re not bringing an untested or unreliable battery into your home. All of the scooters in our testing pool are UL-listed.

    Pneumatic tires — with inner tubes, like bicycle tires — are another feature we recommend, since they soak up the shock of rough surfaces, bumps and cracks, providing better handling and a more comfortable ride. Some cheaper scooters are sold with solid rubber tires that may be puncture-proof, but give you a much less comfortable ride,

    If you want to ensure you’re getting to your destination as fast as possible, look at the maximum speed offered by each unit. Lighter-duty scooters top out at about 15-20 MPH, while beefier models can reach up to 35 MPH. Most scooters let you select a top speed limit, so you can choose to stick to lower speeds if you like.

    Yes, but the specifics of exactly where you can and cannot ride your scooter will depend on the specific rules and regulations in your area. They’re not quite a moped, but also not really a bicycle, so it will require a little research to figure out exactly how you’re supposed to ride your scooter in a way that’s both legal and safe for you and other drivers. Some states haven’t made it clear, while others have adopted rules similar to those governing electric bicycle use.

    For example, the California DMV states that, “You can only drive motorized scooters on a bicycle path, trail, or bikeway, not on a sidewalk, and you cannot exceed a speed of 15 mph.” They also must stick to the right-hand curb, so they’re not allowed in a left-hand turn lane at a stoplight, for example. In this case, you’d need to dismount and use the crosswalk like a pedestrian before entering the bike lane again. They also must stick to roads with a speed limit no greater than 25MPH.

    In our experience, this is solid advice regardless of what the law might prescribe. As a general rule of thumb, we’d recommend sticking to quieter side streets and neighborhoods, avoiding busier thoroughfares and intersections with cars traveling at high speeds, and using multi-use paths where available (and where e-scooter use is allowed).

    Regardless of the city you’re in, and contrary to what you’ve probably seen, you shouldn’t ride your electric scooter on the sidewalk. Not only is it dangerous to pedestrians — especially if they walk out of a doorway into the scooter’s path — there are also obstacles and debris that can cause you to lose your balance. If the sidewalk is your only safe means of travel, dismount your scooter and walk it down the sidewalk.

    They might look like toys, but electric scooters can be just as dangerous, or more so, than other types of personal transportation. Since widespread adoption of electric scooters only dates back to 2017, there has been little long-term research, but some numbers are starting to emerge.

    This 2019 study conducted in two Los Angeles emergency rooms found that over the course of a year, 249 patients were admitted with electric-scooter-related injuries, compared to 195 bicyclists and 181 pedestrian injuries over the same period. While most injuries were minor, 40% of those electric scooter injuries were head injuries, likely due to the relaxed attitude towards helmet-wearing on electric scooters (the study authors wrote that 94.3% of observed scooter riders in their community rode without helmets).

    A 2022 UCLA data analysis of injury data since 2014 suggests that the injury rate for electric scooters was 115 per 1 million rides, more comparable to the injury rate for motorcyclists (estimated at 104 injuries per 1 million motorcycle rides) than to the much lower rates for pedestrians and cyclists.

    Given these emerging insights and considering the high top speeds achievable by the larger scooters we looked at, we would always recommend wearing a well-fitted helmet when riding a scooter, whether your city requires one or not.

    This might sound obvious, but it’s important to actually learn how to properly operate your scooter before hitting the streets, and not just hop right on and hit the accelerator. Make sure to follow any riding instructions or tips in the included user manual, and I’d also recommend taking the time to first get used to riding your scooter in a parking lot or on quiet neighborhood streets. This will help you be aware of riding quirks that you may not otherwise be aware of until you’re traveling at high speeds or in traffic. For example, I quickly noticed in my testing that it was difficult to look over my shoulder without losing my balance, or take a hand off the handlebar to signal or wave at another driver, and I would need to decrease my speed before attempting to do either.

    Underscored best electric scooters Segway Ninebot lineup

    We ran each scooter through a comprehensive testing process to get a clear idea of exactly what makes one model different from another. This made it easy to compare them for rating purposes, as well as accurately explain who they might be best for.

    Since the whole point of purchasing an electric scooter is to make your commute more convenient, it’s important that they’re easy to use. Straightforward operation not only makes for a more comfortable and relaxing riding experience, it also increases overall safety. By spending less time and attention manipulating controls and adjusting ride settings, you can fully focus on the road ahead and your surroundings. I judged each scooter on how easy it was to step on and start riding, as well as operate any in-ride functions like blinkers, bells and speed settings. I also compared each scooter’s charging function, noting types of plugs required and any frustrating issues like a lack of real-time battery level during charging.

    Then, to establish and compare actual battery range, I drove each scooter on the same pre-set route — which included a large hill section and several different surface types — until the battery was completely exhausted. I then timed how long it took to charge that depleted battery back to 100%. (These two metrics are essential for determining whether your scooter can both handle the length of your commute, and charge quickly enough to get you back home at the end of the workday.) I also used these rides to judge each scooter’s top speeds as well as overall power, paying attention to how easily the scooter maintained its speed when ascending the hill or if it struggled and slowed down significantly.

    I also compared each scooter’s controls while riding, focusing on how comfortable and responsive the throttle and brake systems were, as well as additional features like directional blinkers and headlights. To evaluate how convenient each scooter was to store when not in use, I folded up and carried each model up and down a flight of stairs. I noted any issues with overall comfort and weight, as well as the security of the hinge and locking mechanism used.

    I also judged the overall build quality and construction of each scooter, noting how well-built the larger components seemed to be, and inspecting smaller elements like throttles, bells, kickstands and brake handles. I looked to ensure that all these elements were sturdy and solid, and noted if any felt flimsy or cheap.

    It won’t be a practical choice for those who prefer a lightweight, sleek-looking option, but if you want a scooter that can go extremely fast and travel extremely far, the Apollo City Pro could be a great choice. Its twin 500W motors allowed me to easily hit 26 MPH, and a more adventurous rider could adjust the max speed up to 32 MPH. I was most impressed with the range of this scooter, and was able to travel for 25 miles before exhausting the battery. With front and rear suspension, the Apollo City provided the most comfortable, bump-free ride, which, combined with the wide 10-inch pneumatic tires, allowed it to roll over large cracks and divots that lighter-duty scooters would be unable to handle. My biggest takeaways from testing the Apollo City Pro were its heavy weight — 65 pounds is far too heavy to carry around comfortably — and the poorly designed hook system used to lock the frame in place after folding. This hook easily falls out of place when the scooter is set down, which is frustrating as well as a potential safety risk. The buggy, frustrating mobile app was a big drawback as well.

    If security is a priority, you’ll appreciate the two lock options — a digital code that stops the motor from operating and a physical combination lock — provided with the Gotrax G4. The wide display is also really easy to read, and when the scooter is stopped, the speedometer reverts to an odometer, making it easy to see how far along you are on your trip. The 11.8-mile range was relatively low, however, and the black control buttons weren’t very convenient to make out while riding. My favorite feature of the Gotrax G4 is its heavy-duty latch system that keeps the frame locked into place when folded down. On some other large scooters, such as the Apollo City Pro, a slicker-looking but flimsier, less-secure latch is used. On the Gotrax, the bright red clip and fender hook are made with thick metal instead of plastic, giving the entire until a very solid, heavy-duty feel and look that worked great

    Overall, the Niu KQi3 Max scooter provided a comfortable, stable ride during testing, and would be a great choice for anyone with the budget for a higher-end option. The halo-style LED headlight, large rear brake light and side reflectors make it well-suited for nighttime riders too, and the Bluetooth connectivity allows you to quickly lock the unit with your smartphone — great for running inside a store or to an appointment (though it wouldn’t stop someone from carrying it away, so you’ll want to be sure of your surroundings). My favorite feature of the Niu KQi3 Max are the rubber handlebar grips, which have a really grippy, tacky feel to them, making it easy to maintain a tight grip while riding, even when my hands got sweaty. The eight hour charging time is longer than most though (especially compared to the 5 hours of the Segway Ninebot Max), so it might not be practical for those with long commutes and charging accessibility issues.

    The Niu KQi3 Pro has all the same bells and whistles as its more powerful sibling, the Niu KQi3 Max, but in a smaller, more affordable package. As with the pricier model, the mobile app allows you to quickly lock the unit, preventing anyone from riding it, and it emits a loud beep if someone tries to move it. The app also makes it easy to adjust settings — you can select custom speeds, toggle between kilometers and miles per hour, and activate cruise control. Its folding mechanism is simple enough to use, although at 44.75 pound I wish the KQi3 Pro was a bit lighter. The limited battery range of 16 miles is ultimately what kept this scooter out of our top spot, but if that’s not a priority too, the comfortable ride, sturdy construction, and easy operation still make it a great choice.

    It doesn’t have the sleek, high-end design of more expensive scooters, but the Swagger 5 Boost is still capable of zipping you around easily, and a total bargain at its current price. It does have some overall design drawbacks though, as well as operational issues. Its handlebar grips were not only difficult to line up and screw on during assembly, but I also found them easy to accidentally unscrew while riding, a potential safety issue. The display was also inconvenient to read, using dark blue digits on a black background. The throttle and brake controls didn’t have the smooth, controlled feel of other models I tested. Its solid tires, similar to the Unagi Model One’s, also made for a very bumpy ride. All that being said, the low price could still make this scooter a reasonable choice for the rider on a tight budget.

    Although it had the same solid feel, straightforward controls and easy-to-use mobile app as the other Segway models I tested, at 48.5 pounds, the F65 is ultimately just too heavy to carry around on a daily commute, especially if you need to navigate a flight of stairs, lug it onto a train or bus or the like. It does feature directional blinkers though, which makes it a great option for city and nighttime riders, and their controls were easy to turn on and off with a thumb switch. Its 700W-max motor allowed me to easily climb inclines during my testing, and the impressive range — 22.5 miles — was the second longest of all the scooters we tested (only the Apollo City Pro gave us more mileage). If you don’t plan on folding and carrying this scooter, and long range is a priority, the Segway Ninebot F65 could work, but at its weight you might want to consider an e-bike (if it fits your budget).

    With minimal exposed cabling and a handlebar uncluttered by a bell or mechanical handbrake, it’s easy to appreciate the sleek, streamlined design of the Unagi Model One. This stripped-down design not only looks good, but also makes it an extremely easy-to-use machine. Unfortunately, the Unagi is best suited to smooth surfaces and short rides, as the solid tires and lack of any suspension make for a bumpy and uncomfortable ride over rough pavement or asphalt surfaces. I felt every crack and bump as I rode. Also, the 9-mile range was the shortest of all the scooters in our testing. It was the easiest to fold and carry, however. The Unagi Model One folds down and locks into place without having to deal with any extra latches or hooks, and its light weight — just 26.5 pounds — made it the most comfortable option to carry around. So if you just want something sleek and small for a short ride to public transportation, the Unagi might be the ticket.

    The only non-foldable option I tested, the rental-only Lime Gen4 is noticeably sturdier-feeling than the folders, and has a low center of gravity that made for a surprisingly comfortable ride. It also featured angled handlebars that swept back, similar to a bicycle, unlike the straight bars of all my other scooters. This made the Lime Gen4 more comfortable to ride for long periods of time, and easier to maintain control and balance. I noticed that I was also able to briefly take one hand off the handlebar when I needed to signal other cars or scratch my nose, something I had difficulty doing when using straight handlebars. It was inconvenient to track down an available scooter though, not to mention find one that had enough battery to bring me to my destination. I was also surprised by the cost of a Lime scooter. My first ride, with a base fare of $3.50, ended up costing me $19.10 for a 4.9-mile, 26-minute ride. If that were half of my commute, I’d be spending $191 per workweek, which is not ideal — clearly making the argument for scooter ownership.

    [ad_2]

    Source link